Toshiba Projection Television 46HM94 User Manual

OWNER’S MANUAL  
Integrated HD DLP Projection Television  
Compatible with the new Toshiba  
Symbio  
Audio/Video Hard Drive Recorder!  
HIGH-DEFINITION TELEVISION  
See pages 23 and 49 for details.  
For an overview of steps for setting up  
and using your new TV, see page 8.  
I
Owner’s Record  
The model number and serial number are on the back  
of your TV. Record these numbers in the spaces below.  
Refer to these numbers whenever you communicate  
with your Toshiba dealer about this TV.  
46HM94  
52HM94  
62HM94  
Model number:  
Serial number:  
© 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION  
All Rights Reserved  
23566511  
HM94(E)001  
1
8/30/04, 10:03 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Important Safety Instructions  
Installation, Care, and Service  
1) Read these instructions.  
2) Keep these instructions.  
3) Heed all warnings.  
Installation  
Follow these recommendations and precautions and heed all  
warnings when installing your TV:  
4) Follow all instructions.  
5) Do not use this apparatus near water.  
17) Never modify this equipment. Changes or modifications  
may void: a) the warranty, and b) the user’s authority to  
operate this equipment under the rules of the Federal  
Communications Commission.  
6) Clean only with a dry cloth.  
7) Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in  
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.  
8) Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,  
heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including  
amplifiers) that produce heat.  
18)  
DANGER: RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL  
INJURY, DEATH, OR EQUIPMENT  
DAMAGE! Never place the TV on  
9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or  
grounding type plug. A polarized plug has two blades  
with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has  
an unstable cart, stand, or table. The TV  
may fall, causing serious personal injury,  
death, or serious damage to the TV.  
two blades and a third grounding  
Wide plug  
prong. The wide blade or the third  
prong are provided for your safety.  
If the provided plug does not fit into  
your outlet, consult an electrician  
for replacement of the obsolete outlet.  
19) Never place or store the TV in direct sunlight; hot, humid  
areas; areas subject to excessive dust or vibration; or  
locations with temperatures at or below 41°F (5°C).  
20) Always place the TV on the floor or a sturdy, level, stable  
surface that can support the weight of the unit.  
10) Protect the power cord from being  
walked on or pinched, particularly at  
plugs, convenience receptacles, and  
the point where it exits the apparatus.  
21) Never expose the apparatus to dripping or splashing or  
place items such as vases, aquariums, any other item filled  
with liquid, or candles on top of the TV.  
11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the  
manufacturer.  
12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod,  
bracket, or table specified by the  
manufacturer, or sold with the  
22) Always place the back of the television at least one (1)  
inch away from any vertical surface (such as a wall) to  
allow proper ventilation.  
apparatus. When a cart is used, use  
caution when moving the cart/apparatus  
combination to avoid injury from tip-over.  
13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or  
23) Never block or cover the slots or openings in the TV  
cabinet back, bottom, and sides. Never place the TV:  
when unused for long periods of time.  
14) Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.  
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been  
damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug  
is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen  
into the apparatus, or the apparatus has been exposed to  
rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been  
dropped. This applies to all items except those  
specified on pages 98–100 of this manual.  
on a bed, sofa, rug, or similar surface;  
too close to drapes, curtains, or walls; or  
in a confined space such as a bookcase, built-in cabinet,  
or any other place with poor ventilation.  
The slots and openings are provided to protect the TV  
from overheating and to help maintain reliable operation  
of the TV.  
15) CAUTION: To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not  
use the polarized plug with an extension cord, receptacle,  
or other outlet unless the blades can be inserted completely  
to prevent blade exposure.  
24) Never allow anything to rest on or roll over the power  
cord, and never place the TV where the power cord is  
subject to wear or abuse.  
16) WARNING: This product contains a lamp to project  
the picture, and requires special safety precautions:  
• See pages 98–100 for instructions on lamp unit  
replacement and care.  
25) Never overload wall outlets and extension cords.  
DO NOT attempt to service this product except as  
specified on pages 98–100. The only user-serviceable  
item in this product is the lamp unit.  
26) Always operate this equipment from a 120 VAC, 60 Hz  
power source only.  
(continued on next page)  
3
HM94(E)002-04  
3
8/30/04, 10:58 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
46/5262HM94  
Installation (continued from previous page)  
Care (continued from previous column)  
33) For added protection of your TV from lightning and power  
surges, always unplug the power cord and disconnect the  
antenna from the TV if you leave the TV unattended or  
unused for long periods of time.  
27) Always make sure the antenna system is properly  
grounded to provide adequate protection against voltage  
surges and built-up static charges (see Section 810 of the  
National Electric Code).  
Antenna lead-in wire  
34) During normal use, the TV may make occasional snapping  
or popping sounds. This is normal, especially when the  
unit is being turned on or off. If these sounds become  
frequent or continuous, unplug the power cord  
Antenna discharge unit  
(NEC Section 810-20)  
Ground clamp  
and contact a Toshiba Authorized Service Center.  
Grounding conductors  
(NEC Section 810-21)  
35) Special care for DLPTM (digital light processing) units:  
Electric service equipment  
Lamp—The lamp in this product has a limited service life.  
The length of service life varies depending on product  
use or user settings. If you use the lamp beyond its  
service life:  
Power service grounding  
electrode system (NEC Art 250 Part H)  
Ground clamps  
- you may notice a reduction in the colors and/or  
brightness of the picture, at which time you should  
replace the lamp unit; and  
28)  
DANGER: RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL  
INJURY OR DEATH!  
Use extreme care to make sure you are never in  
a position where your body (or any item you are in contact  
with, such as a ladder or screwdriver) can accidentally  
touch overhead power lines. Never locate the antenna  
near overhead power lines or other electrical circuits.  
Never attempt to install any of the following during  
lightning activity: a) an antenna system; or b) cables,  
wires, or any home theater component connected to an  
antenna or phone system.  
- the strength of the quartz glass in the lamp will be  
reduced and the lamp may rupture. If the lamp ruptures,  
the TV will not operate until the lamp unit is replaced.  
See Lamp unit replacement and careon pages 98100.  
Note:  
The lamp unit is designed so broken lamp glass remains  
securely inside the lamp unit.  
The lamp unit contains mercury. Disposal of  
mercury may be regulated due to environmental  
considerations. For disposal or recycling  
information, please contact your local authorities or  
the Electronic Industries Alliance (www.eiae.org).  
Care  
Dispose of the used lamp unit by the approved method for  
your area.  
For better performance and safer operation of your TOSHIBA  
TV, follow these recommendations and precautions:  
Service  
29) Always sit approximately 1025 feet away from the TV and  
as directly in front of it as possible. The picture can appear  
dull if you sit too far to the left or right of the TV, or if  
sunlight or room lights reflect on the screen. Turn the TV  
off to check for reflections on the screen, and then remove  
the source of reflections while viewing the TV.  
36  
)
WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK!  
Never attempt to service the TV yourself,  
except as specified on pages 98100.  
Opening and removing the covers may expose you to  
dangerous voltage or other hazards. Failure to follow this  
WARNING may result in death or serious injury. Refer all  
servicing not specified in this manual to a Toshiba Authorized  
Service Center.  
30) Always unplug the TV before cleaning. Never use liquid or  
aerosol cleaners. Clean only with a soft, dry cloth.  
Do not spray volatile compounds such as insecticide on  
the cabinet. This may cause a discoloration or damage of  
the cabinet.  
37) If you have the TV serviced:  
Ask the service technician to use only replacement parts  
specified by the manufacturer.  
Upon completion of service, ask the service technician to  
perform routine safety checks to determine  
that the TV is in safe operating condition.  
31)  
WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK!  
Never spill liquids or push objects of any  
kind into the TV cabinet slots.  
38) When the TV reaches the end of its useful life, ask a  
qualified service technician to properly dispose of the TV.  
32) If the air temperature rises suddenly (for example, when  
the TV is first delivered), condensation may form on the  
lenses. This can make the picture appear distorted or the  
color appear faded. If this happens, turn off the TV for 6 to  
7 hours to allow the condensation to evaporate.  
Note: The lamp unit contains mercury. Disposal of mercury may  
be regulated due to environmental considerations. Dispose of  
the used lamp unit by the approved method for your area.  
For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local  
authorities or the Electronic Industries Alliance (www.eiae.org).  
4
HM94(E)002-04  
4
8/30/04, 10:58 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
46/5262HM94  
Important notes about your DLPTM projection TV  
1) The light source for this TV is a projection lamp unit with a  
limited service life. When the lamp wears out, the picture may  
become dark or black, or the lamp may fail, at which time you  
must replace the lamp unit. See “Lamp unit replacement and  
care” on pages 98–100.  
fatigue. This is a rare occurrence related to technology of this  
type, and is not a sign of TV malfunction.  
5) Always sit approximately 10–25 feet away from the TV and as  
directly in front of it as possible. The picture quality may be  
affected by your viewing position and length of viewing time. If  
you sit too closely to the TV for too long, you may suffer from  
eye fatigue. See item 29 on page 4.  
2) Each time you turn on the TV, it may take several seconds to go  
from no picture to full picture brightness.  
6)  
This TV contains several cooling fans to moderate the  
internal temperature. You may be able to hear the fans  
for several minutes after the TV is turned off. This is a  
function of the Quick Restart Low Power Shutdown mode and  
is not a sign of TV malfunction. You can set the Quick Restart  
feature to stop the fans as soon as the TV is turned off. See  
“Selecting the Quick Restart feature” on page 50.  
3) The display on this TV is manufactured using a chip that may  
contain up to 1.3 million microscopic mirrors. Each of these  
micromirrors measures less than one-fifth the width of a human  
hair and represents a single pixel on the television display.  
These micromirrors are mounted on tiny hinges that enable  
them to titlt either toward the light source (ON) or away  
from it (OFF). Occasionally, one of these mirrors may become  
inoperative, creating a light or dark pixel on the projection  
surface. This is a structural property of DLP™ projection TV  
technology, and is not a sign of malfunction. Such pixels are  
not visible when the picture is viewed from a normal viewing  
distance (see item 29 on page 4).  
7) The green and red LED lights on the control touchpad (on the  
lower right corner of the TV screen) indicate your TV’s current  
status. If either light flashes, see “LED indications” on page 94  
for details.  
8) Review all safety and operating information in this owner’s  
4) Depending on the media you are viewing, it is possible, although  
unlikely, that a limited number of viewers may see a “rainbow  
effect” on the screen, which can, in rare instances, result in eye  
manual before you use your TV.  
_______________  
The DLP logo and DLP medallion are trademarks of Texas Instruments.  
Contents  
Important Safety Information ............................................. 2-4  
Important notes about your DLP projection TV ................. 5  
Chapter 1: Introduction .......................................................... 7  
Connecting IEEE-1394 video devices................................. 22  
Using analog-compatible IEEE-1394 devices.................. 22  
Supported signals ........................................................... 22  
Using TheaterNet on-screen device control .................... 22  
Connecting an AVHD or D-VHS recorder .................... 23  
IEEE-1394 device initialization ...................................... 23  
IEEE-1394 device management ..................................... 24  
G-LINKconnection ........................................................ 25  
Welcome to Toshiba ...........................................................  
7
Features of your new TV ....................................................  
7
Overview of steps for installing, setting up, and  
using your new TV ...................................................... 8  
Chapter 3: Using the remote control ................................. 26  
Learning about the remote control ..................................... 26  
Installing the remote control batteries................................. 27  
Using the remote control MODE button to control  
Chapter 2: Connecting your TV ............................................ 9  
TV front touchpad and side panel controls  
and connections .............................................................  
9
TV back panel connections ................................................ 10  
Overview of cable types ...................................................... 11  
About the connection illustrations ...................................... 12  
Connecting a digital CableCARD.................................... 12  
Connecting a VCR and antenna or Cable TV  
(no Cable box) ............................................................... 13  
Connecting a camcorder..................................................... 13  
Connecting a VCR and Cable box ..................................... 14  
Connecting a VCR and satellite receiver ............................. 15  
Connecting a DVD player with S-video, a VCR,  
your other devices........................................................... 27  
Remote Control functional key chart ................................. 28  
Programming the remote control to operate  
your other devices........................................................... 30  
Multi-brand remote control device codes............................ 32  
Chapter 4: Menu layout and navigation ........................... 34  
Main menu layout .............................................................. 34  
Setup/Installation menu layout ........................................... 35  
Navigating the menu system............................................... 35  
and a Cable box.............................................................. 16  
Chapter 5: TV Guide On Screensystem setup ............. 36  
Connecting a DVD player with ColorStream®  
TV Guide On Screen reminder .......................................... 39  
(component video) and a VCR ....................................... 17  
Connecting two VCRs ....................................................... 18  
Connecting an HDMIor a DVI device to the  
HDMI input .................................................................. 19  
Connecting a digital audio system ...................................... 20  
Connecting an analog audio system.................................... 20  
Controlling infrared remote-controlled devices  
Chapter 6: Setting up your TV ............................................. 40  
Selecting the menu language............................................... 40  
Configuring the antenna input sources ............................... 40  
Programming channels into the TVs channel memory....... 41  
Programming channels automatically .......................... 41  
Manually adding and deleting channels in the  
through the TV (IR pass-through) .................................. 21  
channel memory ..................................................... 42  
(Continued on next page)  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
5
HM94(E)005-06(Notes&TOC)  
5
11/3/04, 10:48 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
(Continued from previous page)  
Programming your favorite channels .................................. 43  
Setting up and using TheaterNeton-screen  
Switching the speaker audio (main or POP) ................ 74  
Freezing the main picture in the  
device control ................................................................. 44  
Setting up TheaterNet................................................. 44  
Using the TheaterNet control icons............................. 45  
TheaterNet IR device codes .................................. 4648  
Setting the AVHD device skip time .................................... 49  
Setting the HDMIaudio mode........................................ 49  
Setting the time and date .................................................... 49  
Viewing the CableCARDmenu ...................................... 50  
Setting the Quick Restart feature ........................................ 50  
Viewing the digital signal meter ......................................... 51  
Viewing the system status ................................................... 51  
POP double-window .............................................. 74  
POP double-window aspect ratio ................................ 75  
Using the favorite channel scan feature........................ 75  
Adjusting the picture .......................................................... 76  
Selecting the picture mode .......................................... 76  
Adjusting the picture quality ....................................... 76  
Resetting the picture settings....................................... 76  
Using CableClearDNR (digital noise reduction)...... 77  
Selecting the color temperature ................................... 77  
Resetting the advanced picture settings ....................... 77  
Using the closed caption mode ........................................... 78  
Advanced closed captions ............................................ 78  
Digital closed captions ................................................ 78  
Adjusting the audio ............................................................ 79  
Muting the sound ....................................................... 79  
Digital audio selector .................................................. 79  
Selecting stereo/SAP broadcasts................................... 79  
Adjusting the audio quality ......................................... 80  
Using the StableSoundfeature .................................. 80  
Resetting your audio adjustments................................ 80  
Using the SRS WOWsurround sound feature .......... 81  
Turning off the built-in speakers ................................. 81  
Selecting the optical audio output format ................... 81  
Using the memory card JPEG picture viewer/MP3 audio  
player ............................................................................. 82  
Memory card specifications ......................................... 82  
Using the JPEG picture viewer .................................... 83  
Using the MP3 audio player ....................................... 84  
Memory card care and handling .................................. 85  
Using the Game Mode feature ............................................ 85  
Setting the ON/OFF timer ................................................ 86  
Setting the sleep timer ........................................................ 86  
Displaying TV setting information on-screen ..................... 87  
Understanding the auto power off feature........................... 87  
Understanding the last mode memory feature .................... 87  
Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen  
interactive program guide ............................................... 52  
Setting up the TV Guide On Screen system ....................... 52  
Navigating the TV Guide On Screen system ...................... 53  
TV Guide On Screen remote control functions .......... 53  
Video Window ........................................................... 54  
Panel Menus ............................................................... 54  
Info Box...................................................................... 55  
TV Guide On Screen Icons......................................... 55  
TV Guide On Screen Services ............................................ 56  
LISTINGS screen ....................................................... 56  
SEARCH screen.......................................................... 57  
RECORDINGS screen ............................................... 59  
SCHEDULE screen .................................................... 60  
Record features ........................................................... 60  
Remind features .......................................................... 62  
SETUP screen ............................................................. 64  
Change system settings .......................................... 64  
Change channel display ......................................... 64  
Change default options .......................................... 65  
Chapter 8: Using the TVs features .................................... 66  
Selecting the video input source to view ............................. 66  
Labeling the video input sources......................................... 67  
Tuning channels ................................................................. 68  
Tuning to the next programmed channel .................... 68  
Using SpeedSurf to change to a specific  
Chapter 9: Using the Locks menu...................................... 88  
Entering the PIN code ....................................................... 88  
If you cannot remember your PIN code ............................. 88  
Changing your PIN code ................................................... 88  
Blocking TV programs and movies by rating (V-Chip) ......... 89  
Blocking channels............................................................... 90  
Unlocking programs temporarily ........................................ 90  
Locking video inputs .......................................................... 90  
Using the GameTimer..................................................... 91  
Using the front panel lock feature ....................................... 91  
programmed channel .............................................. 68  
Tuning to a specific channel (programmed or  
unprogrammed) ...................................................... 68  
Switching between two channels using  
Channel Return ...................................................... 68  
Switching between two channels using  
SurfLock............................................................... 68  
Selecting the picture size ..................................................... 69  
Natural picture size ..................................................... 69  
TheaterWide® 1 picture size ........................................ 70  
TheaterWide® 2 picture size ........................................ 70  
TheaterWide® 3 picture size ........................................ 70  
Full picture size ........................................................... 70  
Scrolling the TheaterWide® picture .................................... 71  
Using the auto aspect ratio feature ...................................... 71  
Selecting the cinema mode (480i signals only) .................... 72  
Selecting the lamp mode .................................................... 72  
Using the POP features ...................................................... 73  
Using the POP double-window feature ....................... 73  
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting ............................................... 92  
General troubleshooting ..................................................... 92  
LED indications ................................................................. 94  
TV Guide On Screen FAQs ......................................... 9597  
Chapter 11: Appendix ........................................................... 98  
Lamp unit replacement .............................................. 98100  
Specifications ................................................................... 101  
Limited United States Warranty ....................................... 102  
Limited Canada Warranty ................................................ 103  
Index ....................................................................................... 106  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
6
HM94(E)005-06(Notes&TOC)  
6
8/30/04, 1:01 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
1
Welcome to Toshiba  
Thank you for purchasing this Toshiba TV, one of the most innovative DLPprojection TVs on the market. The goal of this manual  
is to guide you through setting up and operating your TV as quickly as possible.  
• This manual applies to models 46HM94, 52HM94, and 62HM94. Before you  
start reading, check the model number on the back of your TV.  
• Instructions in this manual are based on using the remote control. You also  
See “Important notes about your  
DLPprojection TV” on page 5.  
can use the controls on the TV front touchpad if they have the same name as those referred to on the remote control.  
• The side panel and back panel provide terminals for connecting other equipment to your TV. See page 9 for front touchpad and  
side panel details. See page 10 for back panel details. See pages 12–25 for instructions on connecting other devices to your TV.  
Please read all safety and operating instructions in this manual carefully, and keep this manual for future reference.  
Features of your new TV  
The following are just a few of the many exciting features of your new Toshiba widescreen, integrated HD, DLP projection TV:  
Integrated digital tuning (8VSB ATSC and QAM) eliminates the need for a separate digital converter set-top box (in most cases).  
TV Guide On Screen® no-fee interactive program guide (Chapters 5 and 7).  
Digital CableCARDmodule slot for viewing encrypted digital Cable TV programs (page 12).  
Digital recording by connecting a D-VHS digital recording device or a Toshiba Symbio160HD4 Audio/Video Hard Drive  
Recorder to one of the IEEE-1394 jacks. You can record high definition and standard definition material from either tuner (page 23).  
Memory card slots [SD, SmartMedia, MMC, Memory Stick(Pro), CompactFlash®] for viewing JPEG files as a “slide show”  
(page 83) and for playing MP3 files (page 84).  
TheaterNeticons for on-screen control of external IR and IEEE-1394 devices (page 44).  
Two IEEE-1394 ports for multi-device connection and control (page 22).  
HDMI/DVI digital, high-definition multimedia interface (page 19).  
Two sets of ColorStream® HD high-resolution component video inputs (pages 15 and 17).  
Dolby® Digital* (page 20) and SRS® WOW (page 81) audio technologies.  
Digital Audio Out optical audio connection (page 20).  
Game Mode feature for shorter frame delays when playing high-action video games (page 85).  
CableClear™ DNR digital picture noise reduction (page 77).  
• Double-window POP (page 73) and multi-window Favorites (page 75) features.  
______________  
In the United States, TV GUIDE and other related marks are registered marks of Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or one of its affiliates. In Canada, TV GUIDE is a registered mark  
of Transcontinental Inc., and is used under license by Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. The TV Guide On Screen system is manufactured under license from Gemstar-TV Guide  
International, Inc. and/or one of its affiliates. The TV Guide On Screen system is protected by one or more of the following issued United States patents: 6,498,895, 6,418,556, 6,331,877,  
6,239,794, 6,154,203, 5,940,073, 4,908,713, 4,751,578, 4,706,121.  
GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES AND/OR TOSHIBA AMERICA CONSUMER PRODUCTS, L.L.C. ARE NOT  
IN ANY WAY LIABLE FOR THE ACCURACY OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE TV GUIDE ON SCREEN SYSTEM. IN NO  
EVENT SHALL GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES AND/OR TOSHIBA AMERICA CONSUMER PRODUCTS,  
L.L.C. BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNTS REPRESENTING LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, OR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES  
IN CONNECTION WITH THE PROVISION OR USE OF ANY INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT, OR SERVICES RELATING TO THE TV GUIDE ON SCREEN SYSTEM.  
• A recording device is required for recording. Over-the-air or cable access to stations carrying TV Guide On Screen data is required for the TV Guide On Screen system to operate. TV  
Guide On Screen data is not provided by Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C. The provider of the data may elect to discontinue the service or it may cease to be (or never be)  
available in your area. In any of these circumstances, the TV Guide On Screen feature will not function.  
• This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be  
authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited pay-per-view uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is  
prohibited.  
• SRS WOW, SRS and the  
logo are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. SRS WOW technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D logo are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
*
• CableCARD is a trademark of Cable Television Laboratories, Inc.  
• SmartMedia is a registered trademark of Toshiba Corporation.  
• SD is a trademark of SD Card Association.  
• MMC and MultiMediaCard are trademarks of Infineon Technologies AG and licensed to MMCA (MultiMediaCard Association).  
• Memory Stick is a trademark of Sony Corporation.  
Toshiba is an authorized licensee of the CompactFlash® and CF logo® registered trademarks.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
7
HM94(E)007-08(1-Intro)  
7
8/30/04, 1:41 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 1: Introduction  
Overview of steps for installing, setting up, and using your new TV  
Follow these steps to set up your TV and begin using its many exciting features.  
1. Carefully read the important safety, installation, care,  
and service information on pages 2–5. Keep this  
manual for future reference.  
12. See “Menu layout and navigation” for a quick overview  
of navigating the TV’s menu structure (pages 34–35).  
13. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide  
2. Observe the following when choosing a location for  
On Screen® system (if available in your area).  
the TV:  
Note: The TV Guide On Screen program guide  
opens automatically when you turn on the TV.  
To disable this feature:  
Place the TV on the floor or on the optional TV stand listed in  
the “Specifications” section (page 101).  
1) Press TV GUIDE on the remote control to open the TV  
Guide On Screen system (if it is not already open).  
NOTICE OF POSSIBLE TV STAND INSTABILITY  
DANGER: RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY  
OR DEATH! Use this TV only with the TOSHIBA TV stand  
listed in the “Specifications” section (page 101). Use with other stands  
may result in instability, causing possible injury or death.  
2) Use the x • buttons to select the SETUP menu.  
3) Use the yz buttons to select CHANGE DEFAULT  
OPTIONS, and then press ENTER.  
4) Use the yz buttons to select GENERAL DEFAULT  
OPTION, and then press ENTER.  
• Place the TV in a location where light does not reflect on  
the screen.  
5) Set the AUTO GUIDE option to OFF.  
• Place the TV far enough from walls and other objects to  
allow proper ventilation. Inadequate ventilation may cause  
overheating, which will damage the TV. THIS TYPE OF  
DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED UNDER THE TOSHIBA  
WARRANTY.  
6) Use the yz buttons to select DONE, and then press  
ENTER.  
14. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide  
On Screen™ program guide (if available in your area).  
• When using the TV Guide On Screen system to record a  
program for the first time, it is recommended that you  
perform a test recording to make sure your system is set up  
properly.  
• Read “Installation” on pages 3–4.  
• Read “Important notes about your DLP TV” on page 5.  
3. Do not plug in any power cords until AFTER you have  
connected all cables and devices to your TV.  
If the TV power cord is unplugged for an extended period of  
time, it may take up to 24 hours with the TV in standby mode  
(power cord plugged in and power OFF) to download the  
entire TV Guide On Screen program schedule. Be sure to  
follow the instructions under “TV Guide On Screen Reminder”  
on page 39.  
4. BEFORE connecting cables or devices to the TV, learn  
the functions of the TV’s connections and controls (pages 9  
and 10).  
5. Connect your other electronic device(s) to the TV  
(pages 12–25).  
15. Program channels into the TV’s channel memory  
6. Connect the G-LINK™ cable (either one of the enclosed  
IR blaster cables) from your VCR and/or Cable box (if applicable)  
to the G-LINK jack so you can use the TV Guide On Screen®  
features (applies to VCRs and cable boxes only). See page 25.  
(page 41).  
16. Set up the TheaterNet™ on-screen device control  
feature (if applicable to your particular home theater system  
components) (page 44).  
7. Install the batteries in the remote control (page 27).  
17. For details on using the memory card JPEG picture  
8. See “Learning about the remote control” (page 26) for  
viewer and MP audio player, see page 82.  
3
an overview of the buttons on the remote control.  
18. For details on using the TV’s features, see Chapter 8.  
9. Program the remote control to operate your other  
19. For help, refer to the Troubleshooting Guide (Chapter  
device(s) (pages 27–33).  
10).  
10. AFTER connecting all cables and devices, plug in the  
20. For technical specifications, see Chapter 11.  
21. For warranty information, see Chapter 11.  
22. Enjoy your new TV!  
power cords for your TV and other devices.  
11. After you plug in the TV power cord, the green LED (on  
the TV front touchpad, to the left of the POWER button) will  
blink 3 times. Wait about 30 seconds until the green LED  
lights continuously and then press POWER on the TV front  
touchpad or remote control.  
Note: If you sell or transfer this television to a third party, be sure  
to reset the PIN code as described on page 88 under the heading,  
“If you cannot remember your PIN code.”  
See “LED indications” on page 94.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
8
HM94(E)007-08(1-Intro)  
8
8/30/04, 1:41 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Connecting your TV  
2
TV front touchpad and side panel controls and connections  
Front of TV  
Side panel  
Reset button  
0
TV/VIDEO  
EXIT  
CHANNEL  
VOLUME  
MENU  
POWER  
Remote sensor  
1
Front touchpad*  
EXIT  
zyx •  
MENU  
3
4
5
POWER  
TV/VIDEO  
2
Right side of TV  
6
VIDEO-3 IN  
!¡  
Memory card  
slots  
!™  
TV/VIDEO  
EXIT  
CHANNEL  
VOLUME  
MENU  
POWER  
Green/Red LEDs  
Channel zy  
Volume x •  
9
7
8
*Gently touch the printed keys on the touchpad.  
1
2
Remote sensor (behind the screen) — Point the remote  
control toward this area of the TV screen. See “Remote  
control effective range” on page 26.  
9
Green and Red LEDs — When green lights solid (not  
blinking), it indicates that the TV power cord is plugged in  
and the power is OFF. This is called standby mode.  
Note: When you first plug in the power cord, the green LED  
will blink 3 times. After approximately 30 seconds, the green  
LED will light continuously, at which point you can press  
POWER to turn ON the TV.  
TV/VIDEO — Repeatedly press to change the source you are  
viewing (ANT 1, ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3,  
HDMI, ColorStream HD1, ColorStream HD2).  
3
4
EXIT — Press to close an on-screen menu instantly.  
When red lights solid (not blinking), it indicates that the  
TV power cord is plugged in and the POWER is ON.  
ARROWS zyx • — When a menu is on-screen, these  
buttons function as down/up/left/right menu navigation  
buttons.  
See “LED indications” on page 94 for additional  
information.  
5
MENU — Press to access the menu system (see page 34).  
When a menu is on-screen or the TV Guide On Screen  
program guide is open, this button functions as the ENTER  
button.  
0
RESET — If the TV stops responding to the controls on  
the remote control or TV front panel and you cannot turn  
off the TV, press this button to reset the TV.  
Note: The RESET button is recessed, so you will need to use  
the end of a paper clip or similar object to press the button.  
6
7
POWER — Press to turn the TV on and off.  
CHANNEL yz — When no menu is on-screen, these  
buttons change the channel (programmed channels only; see  
page 41). When a menu is on-screen, these buttons function  
as up/down menu navigation buttons.  
VIDEO-3 — The side panel A/V connections are referred to  
as “VIDEO 3” and include standard A/V connections plus  
optional S-video. (The VIDEO 1 and VIDEO 2 A/V  
connections are on the TV’s back panel; see page 10.)  
8
VOLUME x • — When no menu is on-screen, these  
buttons adjust the volume level. When a menu is on-screen,  
these buttons function as left/right menu navigation  
buttons.  
!™ Memory card slots — Insert a memory card into one of  
the memory card slots to view JPEG files (such as photos)  
as a “slide show” on your TV or listen to MP3 audio files  
(see page 82).  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
9
HM94(E)009-11(2A-Cnct)  
9
8/30/04, 1:39 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 2: Connecting your TV  
TV back panel connections  
For an explanation of cable types, see page 11.  
0
!¡ !™  
9
CableCARD™  
TheaterNet  
IEEE1394  
EJECT  
1
ANT1  
(CABLE)  
IN  
AUDIO  
2
HDMI IN  
ANT2  
OUT  
OUT  
1
2
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
R
L
Y
Y
(
)
ANT 75  
8
1
P
B
P
B
{
TheaterNet  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VAR  
AUDIO  
PR  
P
L
R
L/  
L/  
L/  
MONO  
MONO  
MONO  
L
L
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
G-LINK  
R
b
IE
COLOR  
STREAM STREAM  
HD-1 HD-2  
COLOR  
VIDEO  
1
VIDEO  
2
V
S
L
Y
A5  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
OUT  
IN  
I
AI
/  
/  
/  
AI
I
I
R
I
I
II
2
3
4
6
7
5
1 ANT-1 (CABLE) IN and ANT-2 IN Two inputs that  
support analog (NTSC) and digital (ATSC) off-air antenna  
signals and analog and digital (QAM) Cable TV signals.  
8 TheaterNet(IR) OUT — For controlling infrared  
remote-controlled devices through the TV. You can connect  
up to two devices with either one of the enclosed IR blaster  
cables, and then control the devices using the TV’s IR pass-  
through or TheaterNet(on-screen device control) features.  
See pages 21 and 44.  
Note: If you have an antenna only, connect it to ANT-1. If you have  
both cable TV and an antenna, connect the cable TV to ANT-1 and  
the antenna to ANT-2.  
9 Standard Audio IN — For use when connecting a DVI  
device with analog audio output to the HDMI input. See  
page 19. Also see item 10 below.  
0 HDMIIN — High-Definition Multimedia Interface  
input receives digital audio and uncompressed digital video  
from an HDMI device or uncompressed digital video from a  
DVI device. See page 19.  
2 VIDEO 1 IN and VIDEO 2 IN Two sets of standard  
(composite) video and standard audio inputs plus optional  
S-video inputs for connecting devices with composite video  
or S-video output.  
NOTE: Standard (composite) video and S-video cables carry  
only video information; separate audio cables are required for a  
complete connection.  
3 ColorStream® HD-1 and ColorStream® HD-2 Two sets  
of ColorStream® high-definition component video and  
standard stereo audio inputs for connecting devices with  
component video output, such as a Toshiba DVD player  
NOTE: NEVER CONNECT THIS TV TO A PERSONAL  
COMPUTER (PC). This TV is not intended for use with a PC.  
IEEE-1394 Two bi-directional digital IEEE-1394 ports  
for connecting multiple devices with compressed digital  
video. Because these ports are bi-directional, they can be  
used for playback and recording. You can control your  
IEEE-1394 devices using the TV’s TheaterNet on-screen  
control icons. See pages 21–24 and 44.  
®
with ColorStream. See pages 15 and 17.  
Note: Component video cables carry only video information;  
separate audio cables are required for a complete connection.  
4 A/V OUT — Standard composite video and analog audio  
outputs for connecting a VCR for editing and dubbing. See  
page 18 for details.  
NOTE:  
IEEE-1394 cable carries both audio and video information;  
5 Variable Audio OUT — Standard analog audio outputs for  
connecting an analog amplifier with external speakers.  
See page 20.  
no separate audio cables are required for a complete connection.  
• NEVER CONNECT THIS TV TO A PERSONAL  
COMPUTER (PC). This TV is not intended for use with a PC.  
6 Digital Audio OUT — Optical audio output in Dolby  
Digital or PCM (pulse-code modulation) format for  
connecting an external Dolby Digital decoder, amplifier,  
AV receiver, or home theater system with optical audio  
input. See page 20.  
!™ CableCARD™ slot — For use with a digital security card  
and digital cable TV service (provided by your local cable  
operator) to view encrypted digital programming. See  
pages 12 and 50.  
7 G-LINK— For use with one of the enclosed IR blaster/  
G-LINK cables to enable the TV Guide On Screen®  
recording features. See page 25.  
___________  
HDMI, the HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks  
or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.  
CableCARD is a trademark of Cable Television Laboratories, Inc.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
10  
HM94(E)009-11(2A-Cnct)  
10  
8/30/04, 1:39 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 2: Connecting your TV  
Overview of cable types  
NOTE: NEVER CONNECT THIS TV  
TO A PERSONAL COMPUTER (PC).  
THIS TV IS NOT INTENDED FOR USE WITH A PC.  
Coaxial (F-type) cable  
Note: Two dual-wand IR blaster/G-LINK cables are included with your TV. All other required cables,  
if not provided with your other devices, can be purchased at many electronics accessory suppliers.  
Standard A/V cables (red/white/yellow)  
S-video cable  
Coaxial (F-type) cable is used for connecting your antenna, cable TV service,  
and/or cable converter box to the ANT-1 and/or ANT-2 RF inputs on your TV.  
Standard A/V cables (composite video) usually come in sets of three, and are for use  
with video devices with standard audio and standard (composite) video output. These  
cables (and the related inputs on your TV) are typically color-coded according to use:  
yellow for video, red for stereo right audio, and white for stereo left (or mono) audio.  
S-video cable is for use with video devices with S-video output. Separate audio cables  
are required for a complete connection.  
Component video cables (red/green/blue)  
Note: An S-video cable provides better picture performance than a composite video cable.  
If you connect an S-video cable, be sure to disconnect the standard (composite) video cable  
or the picture performance will be unacceptable.  
HDMI cable  
Component video cables come in sets of three and are for use with video devices with  
component video output. (ColorStream® is Toshiba’s brand of component video.)  
These cables are typically color-coded red, green, and blue. Separate audio cables are  
required for a complete connection.  
IEEE-1394 cable (4-pin)  
Note: Component video cables provide better picture performance than a standard (composite)  
video or S-video cable.  
HDMI cable is for use with devices with HDMI (high-definition multimedia  
interface) output. HDMI cable delivers digital audio and video in its native format.  
This cable carries both video and audio information; therefore, no separate audio cables  
are required for a complete HDMI device connection. See page 19 for further details.  
Dual-wand IR blaster/G-LINK cable  
(2 included)  
Note: HDMI cable provides better picture performance than a standard (composite) video or  
S-video cable.  
IEEE-1394 cable is for use with video devices with compressed digital video output  
that meets CEA specifications for IEEE-1394. This cable carries both video and audio  
information; therefore, no separate audio cables are required for a complete connection.  
See pages 22–24.  
Optical audio cable  
Note:  
Note: Although your TV includes both HDMI  
and IEEE-1394 connections, it may not  
operate with another device you have that  
includes such a connection. For example, the  
IEEE-1394 ports are not intended to operate  
with current model Mini DV camcorders, and  
the HDMI input is not intended for  
The transmission capability of IEEE-1394 cable used with this TV must be S400  
(400 Mbps maximum).  
IEEE-1394 cable provides better picture performance than a standard  
(composite) video or S-video cable.  
Dual-wand IR blaster/G-LINKcable is for use with video devices with IR  
(infrared) remote control. Two of these cables are included with your TV. One is for  
connection to the G-LINK jack (page 25) to enable TV Guide On Screenrecording  
features (Chapters 5 and 7). The other can be used with the TV’s IR pass-through  
feature (page 21) and TheaterNet on-screen device control feature (page 44).  
connection to a computer. Copyright  
protection requirements may also prohibit or  
limit connectivity. See page 19 for details  
about the HDMI input. See pages 2224 for  
details about the IEEE-1394 ports.  
Note: The two IR blaster/G-LINK cables included with your TV have specific characteristics  
that allow them to work properly with this TVs IR OUT and G-LINK ports. Never use other  
aftermarket IR blaster or G-LINK cables with this TV. Other cables may not function  
properly and can cause damage. THIS TYPE OF DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED BY YOUR  
TOSHIBA WARRANTY.  
®
Optical audio cable is for connecting receivers with Dolby Digital or PCM  
(pulse-code modulation) optical audio input to the TV’s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT  
jack. See page 20.  
__________  
Dolby is a registered trademark of Dolby Laboratories.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
11  
HM94(E)009-11(2A-Cnct)  
11  
8/30/04, 1:39 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 2: Connecting your TV  
About the connection illustrations  
You can connect different types and brands of devices to your TV in several different configurations. The connection illustrations in  
this manual are representative of typical device connections only. The input/output jacks on your devices may differ from those  
illustrated herein. For details on connecting and using your specific devices, refer to each device’s owner’s manual.  
Connecting a digital CableCARD™  
This digital television is capable of receiving analog basic, digital  
basic, and digital premium cable television programming by  
direct connection to a cable system providing such  
programming.  
A security card (such as a digital CableCARD), provided by  
your cable operator, is required to view encrypted digital  
programming.  
To view encrypted digital channels:  
1. Connect your digital Cable TV cable to ANT-1.  
2. With the front of the CableCARDfacing right, insert it  
into the CableCARD slot on the back of the TV (see  
illustration below left).  
3. After the CableCARD is inserted, a CableCARD option  
appears in the APPLICATIONS menu, with informational  
screens provided by your digital CableCARD service. See  
page 50 for additional information.  
Certain advanced and interactive digital cable services (such as  
video-on-demand, a cable operator’s enhanced program guide,  
and data-enhanced television services) will not work with the  
use of a CableCARD and may require the use of a separate  
set-top box from your cable operator.  
CableCard Connected -- Acquiring  
channel information.  
For more information, call your local cable operator.  
You will need:  
CableCard services will only operate  
with cable signal connected to Antenna 1.  
OK  
one digital CableCARD (contact your cable operator)  
digital cable subscription service (contact your cable  
operator)  
From digital Cable service  
(connect to ANT 1 only)  
NOTE:  
• Never remove the CableCARD carelessly. Be sure to use  
the EJECT button when removing the CableCARD.  
TV back panel  
CableCARD™  
EJECT  
TheaterNet  
IEEE1394  
• Never insert any object or card (including, without  
limitation, a PCMCIA card) other than a CableCARD  
into the CableCARD slot.  
INSERT THIS END  
IN  
AUDIO  
Digital  
• Always make sure the CableCARD is facing the correct  
direction.  
ANT2  
OUT 1  
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
R
L
Y
Y
(
)
ANT 75  
• Connect the cable for your digital cable TV service to  
ANT-1 only.  
OUT 2  
P
B
P
B
TheaterNet  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VAR  
AUDIO  
PR  
P
L
R
• A digital cable subscription is required to use a  
CableCARD. Contact your Cable company for  
information.  
L/  
L/  
L/  
MONO  
MONO  
MONO  
L
L
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
G-LINK  
R
COLOR  
STREAM STREAM  
HD-1 HD-2  
COLOR  
VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2  
• If the TV locks up with the CableCARD inserted, press  
the RESET button on the TV front or unplug the TV, plug  
it in again, and press POWER.  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
OUT  
IN  
• When using a CableCARD, channel programming  
(page 41) is unnecessary because the CableCARD  
automatically loads the cable channel list into the TV’s  
channel memory.  
• The CableCARD will take several seconds to “pair” with  
the TV. CableCARD information and channel listings will  
not be available until this “pairing” process is completed.  
________  
CableCARD is a trademark of Cable Television Laboratories, Inc.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
12  
HM94(E)012-25(2B-Cnct)  
12  
8/31/04, 12:51 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 2: Connecting your TV  
Connecting a VCR and antenna or Cable TV (no Cable box)  
You will need:  
one coaxial cable  
Stereo VCR  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
one set of standard A/V cables  
L
R
IN from ANT  
• For better picture performance, if your VCR has S-video, use an  
S-video cable (plus the audio cables) instead of the standard video  
cable. However, do not connect both types of video cables to  
VIDEO 1 (or VIDEO 2) at the same time or the picture  
performance will be unacceptable.  
CH 3  
CH 4  
IN  
OUT to TV  
OUT  
L
R
• If you have a mono VCR, connect L/MONO on the TV to your  
VCR’s audio out jack using the white audio cable only.  
From Cable TV or antenna  
TV  
TheaterNet  
IEEE1394  
CableCARD™  
EJECT  
To view the antenna or Cable signal:  
Turn OFF the VCR.  
Select the ANT 1 video input source.*  
1
ANT1  
(CABLE)  
IN  
2
AUDIO  
HDMI IN  
To view the VCR:  
Turn ON the VCR. Select the VIDEO 1 video input source  
on the TV.*  
ANT2  
OUT 1  
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
R
L
Y
Y
(
)
ANT 75  
OUT 2  
P
B
R
P
B
R
TheaterNet  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
P
P
L
or…Turn ON the VCR. Select the ANT 1 video input source.*  
Tune the TV to channel 3 or 4 (whichever channel is vacant  
in your area).  
L/  
L/  
L/  
MONO  
MONO  
MONO  
L
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
G-LINK  
R
COLOR  
STREAM STREAM  
HD-1 HD-2  
COLOR  
VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
IN  
AUDIO OUT  
To use the TV Guide On Screen recording features:  
Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT jacks output the signals from the  
ANT 1, ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, or VIDEO 3 jacks when the  
appropriate input mode is selected.  
1. Connect the G-LINK cable according to the instructions  
on page 25.  
2. Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT jacks  
on the TV (see illustration).  
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television  
programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the  
Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject  
you to civil and criminal liability.  
3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to your  
VCR owner’s manual for details), and then turn OFF the  
VCR.  
4. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide  
On Screen system.  
5. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide  
On Screen system.  
Connecting a camcorder  
Camcorder  
You will need:  
one set of standard A/V cables  
• For better picture performance, if your camcorder has S-video, use an  
S-video cable (plus the audio cables) instead of the standard video cable.  
Do not connect both an S-video cable and a standard video cable to VIDEO  
3 at the same time or the picture performance will be unacceptable.  
VIDEO AUDIO  
OUT  
L
R
To view the camcorder video:  
Select the VIDEO 3 video input source.*  
_____________  
*
To select the video input source, press INPUT on the remote control (see page 67).  
To program the TV remote control to operate other devices, see Chapter 3.  
VIDEO 3 inputs on TV right side panel  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
13  
HM94(E)012-25(2B-Cnct)  
13  
8/31/04, 12:51 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 2: Connecting your TV  
Connecting a VCR and Cable box  
You will need:  
From Cable TV  
one Cable signal splitter  
five coaxial cables  
IN  
Cable box  
OUT  
Cable splitter  
OUT  
IN  
CH 3  
CH 4  
two sets of standard A/V cables  
OUT  
• For better picture performance from your VCR: If your VCR has  
S-video, connect an S-video cable (plus the audio cables) instead  
of the standard video cable. Do not connect an S-video cable and a  
standard video cable to VIDEO 1 (or VIDEO 2) at the same time  
or the picture performance will be unacceptable.  
Stereo VCR  
IN from ANT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
L
R
CH 3  
CH 4  
IN  
OUT to TV  
OUT  
• If you have a mono VCR, connect L/MONO on the TV to your  
VCR’s audio out jack using the white audio cable only.  
L
R
• For better picture performance from your Cable box: If your Cable  
box has component video, you can connect component video  
cables (plus the audio cables) instead of the standard video cable  
from the Cable box to the ColorStream HD-1 inputs on the TV. You  
would then select ColorStream HD-1 as the video input source.*  
TV  
TheaterNet  
IEEE1394  
CableCARD™  
EJECT  
1
ANT1  
(CABLE)  
IN  
AUDIO  
HDMI IN  
• When you use a Cable box, you may not be able to use the  
remote control to program or access certain features on  
the TV.  
ANT2  
OUT 1  
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
R
L
Y
Y
(
)
ANT 75  
OUT 2  
P
B
R
P
B
R
TheaterNet  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
IDEO  
AUDIO  
P
P
L
To view basic Cable channels and use the TVs features:  
L/  
L/  
L/  
MONO  
MONO  
MONO  
L
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
Select the ANT 2 video input source.* Use the TV front  
panel controls or remote control to change channels and  
access the TV’s features.  
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
G-LINK  
R
COLOR  
STREAM STREAM  
HD-1 HD-2  
COLOR  
VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
OUT  
IN  
To view basic and premium Cable channels:  
Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT jacks output the signals from the  
ANT 1, ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, or VIDEO 3 jacks when the  
appropriate input mode is selected.  
Turn OFF the VCR. Select the ANT 1 video input source.*  
Tune the TV to channel 3 or 4 (whichever channel is vacant  
in your area). Use the Cable box controls to change  
channels.  
or…Turn ON the VCR. Tune the VCR to channel 3 or 4  
(whichever channel is vacant in your area). Select the  
VIDEO 1 video input source.* Use the Cable box controls  
to change channels.  
To enable the TV Guide On Screen system to work  
with your cable box and to use the TV Guide  
On Screen recording features:  
1. Connect the G-LINK cable according to the instructions  
on page 25.  
To view the VCR:  
Turn ON the VCR. Select the VIDEO 1 video input  
source.*  
Note: This will provide better picture performance if you  
connected an S-video cable as mentioned in the first bulleted  
item on this page.  
2. Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT jacks  
on the TV (see illustration).  
3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to your  
VCR owner’s manual for details), and then turn OFF the  
VCR.  
or…Turn ON the VCR. Select the ANT 1 video input source.*  
Tune the TV to channel 3 or 4 (whichever channel is vacant  
in your area).  
4. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide  
On Screen system.  
5. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide  
On Screen system.  
_____________  
*
To select the video input source, press INPUT on the remote control  
(see page 67). To program the TV remote control to operate other  
devices, see Chapter 3.  
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television  
programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the  
Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject  
you to civil and criminal liability.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
14  
HM94(E)012-25(2B-Cnct)  
14  
8/31/04, 12:52 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 2: Connecting your TV  
Connecting a VCR and satellite receiver  
Note: The TV Guide On Screen® system does not receive program  
listings from or for any satellite service.  
Stereo VCR  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
R
From  
antenna  
You will need:  
IN from ANT  
CH 3  
CH 4  
IN  
L
L
three coaxial cables  
OUT  
OUT to TV  
R
one set of component video cables (if your  
satellite receiver does not have component  
video, connect the standard A/V cables only)  
three sets of standard A/V cables  
TV  
• For better picture performance, if your satellite  
receiver and VCR have S-video, connect S-video  
cables (plus the audio cables) instead of the standard  
video cables. Do not connect both types of video  
cable to VIDEO 1 (or VIDEO 2) at the same time or  
the picture performance will be unacceptable.  
TheaterNet  
IEEE1394  
CableCARD™  
EJECT  
1
ANT1  
(CABLE)  
IN  
AUDIO  
2
HDMI IN  
ANT2  
OUT 1  
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
R
L
Y
Y
(
)
ANT 75  
• If you have a mono VCR, connect L/MONO on the  
TV (VIDEO 1) to your VCR’s AUDIO OUT jack using  
the white audio cable only.  
OUT 2  
PB  
PR  
TheaterNet  
VIDEO  
EO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
L/  
L/  
L/  
MONO  
NO  
MONO  
UDIO  
R
L
AUDIO  
R
L
AUDIO  
R
AUD
R
AUDIO  
R
G-LINK  
To view satellite programs using the  
component video connections:  
R
COLOR  
COLOR  
VIDEO  
1
DEO  
2
STREAM STREAM  
HD-1  
HD-2  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
OUT  
IN  
Select the ColorStream HD-1 video input  
source on the TV.*  
From  
satellite  
dish  
AUDIO  
OUT  
L
L
Y
PB  
PR  
To view satellite programs using the standard  
Satellite  
IN  
R
R
S-VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO  
OUT  
VIDEO  
OUT  
video connections or to record satellite programs:  
Turn on all three devices. Set the VCR to the appropriate  
line input (refer to your VCR owner’s manual for details).  
Select the VIDEO 2 video input source on the TV.*  
Satellite receiver  
Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT jacks output the signals from the  
ANT 1, ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, or VIDEO 3 jacks when the  
appropriate input mode is selected.  
To view the VCR or view and record antenna channels:  
Turn ON the VCR. Select the ANT-1 video input source  
on the TV.*  
Tune the TV to channel 3 or 4 (whichever channel is vacant  
in your area).  
To use the TV Guide On Screen recording features:  
1. Connect the G-LINK cable according to the instructions  
on page 25.  
or... Turn ON the VCR. Tune the VCR to the channel you  
want to watch. Select the VIDEO 1 video input source on  
the TV.*  
2. Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT jacks  
on the TV (see illustration).  
_____________  
*
To select the video input source, press INPUT on the remote control  
(see page 67). To program the TV remote control to operate other  
devices, see Chapter 3.  
3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to your  
VCR owner’s manual for details), and then turn OFF the  
VCR.  
4. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide  
On Screen system.  
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television  
programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the  
Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject  
you to civil and criminal liability.  
5. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide  
On Screen system.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
15  
HM94(E)012-25(2B-Cnct)  
15  
8/31/04, 12:52 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 2: Connecting your TV  
Connecting a DVD player with S-video, a VCR, and a Cable box  
From antenna or Cable TV  
You will need:  
five coaxial cables  
IN  
Cable box  
OUT  
Cable splitter  
OUT  
two sets of standard A/V cables  
IN  
CH 3  
CH 4  
Note: If you have a mono VCR, connect L/MONO on the TV  
(VIDEO 1) to your VCR’s audio out jack using the white audio  
cable only.  
OUT  
Stereo VCR  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
one S-video cable  
one pair of standard audio cables  
Note:  
L
R
IN from ANT  
OUT to TV  
CH 3  
CH 4  
IN  
OUT  
• If your DVD player does not have S-video, use a standard  
video cable instead. Do not connect an S-video cable and a  
standard video cable to VIDEO 1 (or VIDEO 2) at the same  
time or the picture performance will be unacceptable.  
TV  
TheaterNet  
IEEE1394  
CableCARD™  
EJECT  
1
ANT1  
(CABLE)  
• If your DVD player has component video, see page 17.  
IN  
AUDIO  
2
• Do not connect the DVD player and VCR to the same set of  
A/V inputs on the TV. (See the illustration, which shows the  
VCR connected to VIDEO 1 on the TV, and the DVD player  
connected to VIDEO 2.)  
HDMI IN  
ANT2  
OUT 1  
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
R
L
Y
Y
(
)
ANT 75  
OUT 2  
P
P
B
R
PB  
TheaterNet  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
P
L
R
L/  
L/  
L/  
To view basic channels and access the TVs features:  
MONO  
M
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
G-LINK  
Select the ANT 2 video input source.* Use the TV  
controls to change channels and access the TV’s features.  
R
COLOR  
STREAM STREAM  
HD-1 HD-2  
COLOR  
VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
OUT  
IN  
To view premium Cable channels:  
Turn OFF the VCR. Select the ANT 1 video input  
source.* Tune the TV to channel 3 or 4 (whichever  
channel is vacant in your area). Use the Cable box  
controls to change channels.  
AUDIO  
OUT  
L
S-VIDEO  
OUT  
VIDEO  
OUT  
R
or…Turn ON the VCR. Tune the VCR to channel 3 or 4  
(whichever channel is vacant in your area). Select the  
VIDEO 1 video input source.* Use the Cable box  
controls to change channels.  
DVD player with S-video  
Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT jacks output the signals from the ANT 1,  
ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, or VIDEO 3 jacks when the appropriate input mode  
is selected.  
Note: When you use a Cable box, you may not be able to  
use the remote control to program or access certain  
features on the TV.  
To enable the TV Guide On Screen system to work with  
your cable box and to use the TV Guide On Screen  
recording features:  
To view the DVD player:  
Turn ON the DVD player. Select the VIDEO 2 video  
input source.*  
1. Connect the G-LINK cable according to the instructions on  
page 25.  
2. Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT jacks  
on the TV (see illustration).  
To view VCR 1:  
Turn ON the VCR. Select the VIDEO 1 video input  
source on the TV.*  
3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to your VCR  
owner’s manual for details), and then turn OFF the VCR.  
or…Turn ON the VCR. Select the ANT 1 video input  
source.* Tune the TV to channel 3 or 4 (whichever  
channel is vacant in your area).  
4. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide  
On Screen system.  
5. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide On Screen  
system.  
_____________  
*
To select the video input source, press INPUT on the remote control  
(see page 67). To program the TV remote control to operate other  
devices, see Chapter 3.  
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television  
programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the  
Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject you  
to civil and criminal liability.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
16  
HM94(E)012-25(2B-Cnct)  
16  
8/31/04, 12:52 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 2: Connecting your TV  
Connecting a DVD player with ColorStream® (component video) and a VCR  
Your TV has ColorStream® (component video) inputs.  
From antenna or Cable  
Connecting a DVD player with component video output (such  
Stereo VCR  
as a Toshiba DVD player with ColorStream®) can greatly  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
enhance picture quality.  
L
R
IN from ANT  
OUT to TV  
CH 3  
CH 4  
IN  
You will need:  
OUT  
two coaxial cables  
two sets of standard A/V cables  
• For better picture performance, if your VCR has S-video, use an  
S-video cable (plus the audio cables) instead of the standard  
video cable. However, do not connect both types of video cable to  
VIDEO 1 (or VIDEO 2) at the same time or the picture  
performance will be unacceptable.  
TV  
TheaterNet  
IEEE1394  
CableCARD™  
EJECT  
1
ANT1  
(CABLE)  
IN  
AUDIO  
2
• If you have a mono VCR, connect L/MONO on the TV  
(VIDEO 1) to your VCR’s audio out jack using the white audio  
cable only.  
HDMI IN  
ANT2  
OUT  
OUT  
1
2
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
R
L
Y
Y
(
)
ANT 75  
one pair of standard audio cables  
B
R
PB  
TheaterNet  
VIDEO  
VIDE
AUDIO  
P
L
R
one set of component video cables  
L/  
L/  
L/  
MONO  
MONO  
L
You can connect the component video cables (plus audio  
cables) from the DVD player to either set of ColorStream  
jacks on the TV (HD-1 or HD-2). The ColorStream HD-1 and  
HD-2 jacks can be used with Progressive (480p, 720p) and  
Interlaced (480i, 1080i) scan systems. A 1080i signal will  
provide the best picture performance.  
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
G-LINK  
R
COLOR  
COLOR  
VIDEO  
1
VIDEO  
2
STREAM STREAM  
HD-1  
HD-2  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
OUT  
IN  
AUDIO  
OUT  
Y
PB  
PR  
• If your DVD player does not have component video, see  
page 16. If your DVD player has HDMI video, see page 19.  
L
S-VIDEO  
OUT  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
VIDEO  
OUT  
R
To view antenna or Cable channels:  
DVD player with component video  
Turn OFF the VCR. Select the ANT 1 video input  
source on the TV.*  
Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT jacks output the signals from the  
ANT 1, ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, or VIDEO 3 jacks when the  
appropriate input mode is selected.  
To view the DVD player:  
Turn ON the DVD player. Select the ColorStream HD-1  
video input source on the TV.*  
To use the TV Guide On Screen recording features:  
1. Connect the G-LINK cable according to the instructions  
on page 25.  
To view the VCR:  
Turn ON the VCR. Select the VIDEO 1 video input  
source on the TV.*  
2. Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT jacks  
on the TV (see illustration).  
or…Turn ON the VCR. Select the ANT 1 video input source.*  
Tune the TV to channel 3 or 4 (whichever channel is  
vacant in your area).  
3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to your  
VCR owner’s manual for details), and then turn OFF the  
VCR.  
4. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide  
On Screen system.  
To record a TV program while watching a DVD:  
Turn ON the VCR. Tune the VCR to the channel to  
record. Select the ColorStream HD-1 video input source  
on the TV* to view the DVD.  
5. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide  
On Screen system.  
_____________  
*
To select the video input source, press INPUT on the remote control  
(see page 67). To program the TV remote control to operate other  
devices, see Chapter 3.  
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television  
programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the  
Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject  
you to civil and criminal liability.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
17  
HM94(E)012-25(2B-Cnct)  
17  
8/31/04, 12:52 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 2: Connecting your TV  
Connecting two VCRs  
You will need:  
VCR1 (plays)  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
R
two coaxial cables  
two sets of standard A/V cables  
From  
antenna  
or Cable  
IN from ANT  
CH 3  
CH 4  
IN  
L
L
• For better picture performance, if VCR 1 has S-video,  
use an S-video cable (plus the audio cables) instead of  
the standard video cable. However, do not connect both  
OUT  
OUT to TV  
R
types of video cable to VIDEO 1 (or VIDEO 2) at the same time  
or the picture performance will be unacceptable.  
TV  
TheaterNet  
IEEE1394  
CableCARD™  
EJECT  
• If VCR 1 has mono audio, connect L/MONO on the TV (VIDEO 1)  
to the audio out jack on VCR 1 using the white audio cable only.  
1
ANT1  
(CABLE)  
IN  
AUDIO  
• Do not connect the same VCR to the output and input jacks on the  
TV at the same time.  
2
HDMI IN  
ANT2  
OUT  
OUT  
1
2
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
R
L
Y
Y
To view the antenna or Cable signal:  
(
)
ANT 75  
a
P
B
R
PB  
Turn OFF VCR 1. Select the ANT-1 video input source.*  
TheaterNet  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
P
P
R
AIO  
L/  
L/  
L/  
To view VCR 1:  
MONO  
MONO  
L
AUDIO  
R
b
UDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
G-LINK  
Turn ON VCR 1. Select the VIDEO 1 video input source.*  
R
COLOR  
COLOR  
VIDEO  
1
VIDEO  
2
STREAM STREAM  
HD-1 HD-2  
To dub or edit from VCR 1 to VCR 2:  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
OUT  
IN  
Turn ON both VCRs. Set VCR 2 to the appropriate line  
input (refer to your VCR owner’s manual for details).  
VCR2 (records)  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
Select the VIDEO 1 video input source.*  
Note:  
IN from ANT  
OUT to TV  
CH 3  
CH 4  
IN  
L
L
R
R
OUT  
• If you have a Cable box, connect the Cable box and splitter to VCR1  
as shown on page 14.  
L
R
• The VIDEO OUT signal incorporates Macrovision® copyright  
protection technology, which may prevent you from recording certain  
copy-restricted video materials.**  
a
The VIDEO OUT jack does not output the POP picture.  
b
When the POP window is open, the AUDIO OUT jacks output the  
sound of the active window (main or POP). For additional  
information, see “Notes about recording” on page 73.  
Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT jacks output the signals from  
the ANT 1, ANT 2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, or VIDEO 3 jacks when  
the appropriate input mode is selected.  
_____________  
*
To select the video input source, press INPUT on the remote control  
(see page 67). To program the TV remote control to operate other  
devices, see Chapter 3.  
To use the TV Guide On Screen recording features:  
Note: If you connect your devices according to the  
illustration above, you will record from the TV Guide  
On Screen system to the VCR labeled “VCR2.”  
**This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by  
U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection  
technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other  
limited pay-per-view uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision.  
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Macrovision is a registered  
trademark of Macrovision Corporation.  
1. Connect the G-LINK cable according to the instructions  
on page 25.  
2. Make sure the VCR2 is connected to the A/V OUT jacks  
on the TV (see illustration).  
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television  
programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the  
Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject  
you to civil and criminal liability.  
3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to your  
VCR owner’s manual for details), and then turn OFF the  
VCR.  
4. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide  
On Screen system.  
5. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide  
On Screen system.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
18  
HM94(E)012-25(2B-Cnct)  
18  
8/31/04, 12:52 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 2: Connecting your TV  
Connecting an HDMIor a DVI device to the HDMI input  
The HDMI[1] input on your TV receives digital audio  
___________  
[1]  
and uncompressed digital video from an HDMI device  
HDMI = High-Definition Multimedia Interface.  
DVI = Digital Video Interface.  
or uncompressed digital video from a DVI[2] device.  
[2]  
[3]  
[4]  
This input is designed to accept HDCP[3] program material in  
digital form from EIA/CEA-861/861B–compliant[4] consumer  
electronic devices (such as a set-top box or DVD player with  
HDMI or DVI output).  
HDCP = High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection.  
EIA/CEA-861/861B compliance covers the transmission of  
uncompressed digital video with high-bandwidth digital content  
protection, which is being standardized for reception of high-definition  
video signals. Because this is an evolving technology, it is possible that  
some devices may not operate properly with the TV.  
The HDMI input is designed for best performance with 720p  
and 1080i high-definition video signals, but will also accept  
and display 480i and 480p signals.  
NOTE: To ensure that the HDMI or DVI device is reset  
properly, it is recommended that you follow these  
procedures:  
NOTE: NEVER CONNECT THIS TV  
TO A PERSONAL COMPUTER (PC).  
THIS TV IS NOT INTENDED FOR USE WITH A PC.  
• When turning on your electronic components, turn on  
the TV first, and then the HDMI or DVI device.  
• When turning off your electronic components, turn off  
the HDMI or DVI device first, and then the TV.  
To connect an HDMI device, you will need:  
• one HDMI cable (type A connector)  
To connect a DVI device, you will need:  
For proper operation, it is recommended that you use  
as short an HDMI cable as possible. You should not  
encounter difficulty if you use an HDMI cable shorter  
than 16.4 ft (5m).  
• one HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable  
(HDMI type A connector)  
For proper operation, the length of an HDMI-to-DVI  
adapter cable should not exceed 9.8 ft (3m). The  
recommended length is 6.6 ft (2m).  
HDMI cable transfers both video and audio. Separate  
analog audio cables are not required (see illustration  
below). Some CDVs (video CDs) may not output digital  
audio signals. In that case, you may hear sound by  
connecting analog audio cables. However, if you connect  
analog audio cables with this connection, the HDMI  
terminal on the TV will not receive the HDMI digital audio  
signal and you will hear analog audio only.  
• one pair of standard analog audio cables  
An HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable transfers video only. Separate  
analog audio cables are required (see illustration below).  
See “Setting the HDMI audio mode” on page 49.  
DVI device  
See “Setting the HDMI audio mode” on page 49.  
DVI/HDCP  
OUT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
R
HDMI device  
IN  
L
L
HDMI OUT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
OUT  
R
IN  
L
L
R
OUT  
R
TV  
TheaterNet  
IEEE1394  
CableCARD™  
EJECT  
TV  
CableCARD™  
EJECT  
TheaterNet  
IEEE1394  
1
ANT1  
(CABLE)  
IN  
2
AUDIO  
1
ANT1  
(CABLE)  
HDMI IN  
IN  
AUDIO  
2
ANT2  
OUT  
OUT  
1
2
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
HDMI IN  
Y
Y
(
)
ANT 75  
ANT2  
OUT  
OUT  
1
2
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
R
L
PB  
PB  
Y
Y
(
)
ANT 75  
TheaterNet  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VAR  
AUDIO  
PR  
P
L
R
P
B
R
P
B
R
L/  
L/  
L/  
TheaterNet  
MONO  
MONO  
MONO  
L
L
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VAR  
AUDIO  
P
P
L
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
L/  
G-LINK  
L/  
L/  
MONO  
MONO  
MONO  
L
L
R
COLOR  
STREAM STREAM  
HD-1 HD-2  
COLOR  
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
VIDEO  
1
VIDEO  
2
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
G-LINK  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
OUT  
R
IN  
COLOR  
STREAM STREAM  
HD-1 HD-2  
COLOR  
VIDEO  
1
VIDEO  
2
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
OUT  
IN  
___________  
HDMI, the HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface  
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
19  
HM94(E)012-25(2B-Cnct)  
19  
8/31/04, 12:52 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 2: Connecting your TV  
Connecting a digital audio system  
Dolby Digital decoder or  
other digital audio system  
The TV’s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack outputs a  
or 2-channel down-mixed PCM (pulse-code  
modulation) signal for use with an external Dolby Digital  
decoder or other external audio system with optical audio input.  
Optical  
Audio IN  
LINE IN  
L
R
TV  
You will need:  
TheaterNet  
IEEE1394  
CableCARD™  
EJECT  
one optical audio cable  
To control the audio:  
1
ANT1  
(CABLE)  
IN  
AUDIO  
2
Turn on the TV and the digital audio device.  
HDMI IN  
ANT2  
OUT 1  
Press MENU on the TV’s remote control and open the AUDIO  
menu.  
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
R
L
Y
Y
(
)
ANT 75  
OUT 2  
PB  
PB  
TheaterNet  
Highlight AUDIO SETUP and press ENTER.  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VAR  
AUDIO  
P
R
P
L
R
L/  
L/  
L/  
MONO  
MONO  
MONO  
In the OPTICAL OUTPUT FORMAT field, select either  
DOLBY DIGITAL or PCM, depending on your device (see  
“Selecting the optical audio output format” on page 81).  
L
L
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
G-LINK  
R
COLOR  
STREAM STREAM  
HD-1 HD-2  
COLOR  
VIDEO  
1
VIDEO  
2
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
OUT  
IN  
Note:  
• Some audio systems may not be compatible with Dolby Digital bitstream  
signals. Older audio systems that are not compatible with standard  
optical out signals may not work properly, creating a high noise level that  
may damage speakers or headphones. THIS DAMAGE IS NOT  
COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY.  
Turn off the TV’s built-in speakers in the same AUDIO SETUP  
menu (above). Also see “Turning off the built-in speakers” on  
page 81.  
• The DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack may not output some digital audio  
sources because of copy restrictions.  
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television  
programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the  
Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject  
you to civil and criminal liability.  
Connecting an analog audio system  
This connection allows you to use external speakers with an  
external audio amplifier to adjust the sound level.  
Analog audio amplifier  
LINE IN  
You will need:  
L
R
one pair of standard audio cables  
To control the audio:  
TV  
Turn on the TV and the stereo amplifier.  
TheaterNet  
IEEE1394  
CableCARD™  
EJECT  
Turn off the TV’s built-in speakers (see “Turning off the built-in  
speakers” on page 81).  
1
ANT1  
(CABLE)  
IN  
AUDIO  
2
HDMI IN  
Note: To hear sound when using an external audio amplifier,  
the volume of both the TV and the amplifier must be set to a  
reasonable listening level.  
ANT2  
OUT 1  
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
R
L
Y
Y
(
)
ANT 75  
OUT 2  
PB  
PR  
PB  
PR  
TheaterNet  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VAR  
AUDIO  
L/  
L/  
L/  
MONO  
MONO  
MONO  
L
AUDIO  
R
L
AUDIO  
R
L
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
G-LINK  
R
COLOR  
STREAM STREAM  
HD-1 HD-2  
COLOR  
VIDEO  
1
VIDEO  
2
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
OUT  
IN  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
20  
HM94(E)012-25(2B-Cnct)  
20  
8/31/04, 12:53 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 2: Connecting your TV  
Controlling infrared remote-controlled devices through the TV (IR pass-through)  
You can use the TV’s IR OUT jack (infrared pass-through)  
to remotely operate (through the TV) many infrared  
remote-controlled devices (such as a Toshiba infrared  
remote-controlled VCR or DVD player) enclosed within  
an entertainment center or similar cabinet. Without the  
IR OUT connection, the device typically would need to be  
visible to operate it remotely.  
Front of IR-controlled DVD player (for example)  
You will need:  
Front of IR-controlled audio device (for example)  
one dual-wand IR blaster cable (included with your TV)  
other audio/video cables as required to connect the device(s)  
to the TV (see pages 13–20)  
Infrared  
sensor  
To connect the IR blaster cable:  
1. Locate the infrared sensor on the front of your device.  
This sensor is marked on some devices.*  
IR blaster cable wand  
2. Align one of the IR blaster cable’s wands about 1 inch away  
from the infrared sensor on the front of the device and  
attach it using double-sided mounting tape. If you have a  
second device, attach the second wand in a similar manner.  
(See illustration at right.)  
(approx. 1 inch from device)  
Back of TV  
TheaterNet  
IEEE1394  
CableCARD™  
EJECT  
1
ANT1  
(CABLE)  
IN  
AUDIO  
2
HDMI IN  
Note: If you do not have a second device, coil the second wand  
with a rubber band and leave it behind the TV.  
ANT2  
OUT  
OUT  
1
2
D
S-VIDEO  
R
L
Y
Y
(
)
ANT 75  
PB  
PB  
TheaterNet  
3. Plug the IR blaster cable’s plug into one of the TV’s  
TheaterNet OUT jacks.  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VAR  
AUDIO  
P
R
P
L
R
L/  
L/  
L/  
MONO  
MONO  
MONO  
L
L
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
G-LINK  
To control the device(s):  
R
COLOR  
STREAM STREAM  
HD-1 HD-2  
COLOR  
VIDEO  
1
VIDEO  
2
Point the TV remote control  
(programmed to operate the  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
OUT  
IN  
device; see Chapter 3) or the  
device’s remote control at the front  
of the TV and press the button for  
the desired function. The signal  
TV/VIDEO  
EXIT  
CHANNEL  
VOLUME  
MENU  
POWER  
passes from the remote control  
through the TV to the device via  
the IR blaster cable.  
T
L
Note:  
TheaterNet™ on-screen device control  
• If you use the device’s remote  
For additional control options  
for your home theater system,  
set up the TheaterNet on-screen  
control to operate the device, you  
also will need to use the TV’s remote control to operate the TV.  
• For additional control options, see “TheaterNet on-screen device  
control” at right.  
DVD  
device control feature. You can  
use this feature to control many  
IR remote-controlled devices  
and IEEE-1394 devices using  
the on-screen control icons.  
*
If you cannot locate the device’s infrared sensor:  
TV/VIDEO  
EXIT  
CHANNEL  
VOLUME  
MENU  
POWER  
1. Turn OFF the device.  
2. Starting at the lower left corner of the device, place the end of the  
device’s remote control (with the infrared emitter) so it touches the  
front of the device and press POWER. (Do not use the TV’s remote  
control for this step.)  
3. If the device turns on, the place the remote control touched the  
device is the location of the sensor.  
See pages 44–48 for details on  
setting up and using TheaterNet.  
L
I
See pages 22–24 for details on  
connecting IEEE-1394 devices.  
Note: The TheaterNet icon controls are the only device functions  
available when the icons are on-screen. To access other device  
functions, close the TheaterNet icon window.  
4. If the device does not turn on, move the remote control slightly to the  
right and press POWER again.  
5. Repeat step 4 until you locate the device’s infrared sensor.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
21  
HM94(E)012-25(2B-Cnct)  
21  
8/31/04, 12:53 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 2: Connecting your TV  
Connecting IEEE-1394 video devices  
You can use the two bi-directional IEEE-1394 ports on the back  
of your TV to connect digital video devices that meet CEA  
specifications for IEEE-1394.  
NOTE: NEVER CONNECT THIS TV  
TO A PERSONAL COMPUTER (PC).  
THIS TV IS NOT INTENDED FOR USE WITH A PC.  
Because these ports are bi-directional, they can be used for both  
playback and recording.  
Supported signals  
• Because IEEE-1394 is an evolving technology, it is possible that some  
or all of the connectivity features of a device you connect to the TV  
through the IEEE-1394 ports may not operate. You should confirm  
that the devices you desire to use with the IEEE-1394 ports will  
operate with those ports.  
The IEEE-1394 ports support the signals listed below only.  
Although incompatible video, audio, and digital control signals  
cannot be decoded by the TV, these signals may be passed  
through the IEEE-1394 cable to other compatible devices.  
Incompatible devices may not appear in the TheaterNetmenu.  
• This TV does not support all possible IEEE-1394 signal types. For  
information on signals supported by the IEEE-1394 ports, see  
“Supported signals” at right.  
• MPEG-2 digital video signals  
• IEEE-1394 cable carries both audio and video information;  
no separate audio cables are required for a complete connection.  
Other digital video signals—such as DV video—are  
incompatible and must be decoded by the source device and  
sent to the TV as analog video (composite or S-video).  
You will need:  
one (or two) IEEE-1394 cables  
• Dolby Digital and MPEG digital audio signals  
Other digital audio signals (such as DPM, MP3, and DTS)  
are incompatible and cannot be decoded by the TV.  
Note: The transmission capability of IEEE-1394 cable used with this  
TV must be S400 (400 Mbps maximum).  
additional A/V cables if your device is analog-compatible  
• EIA-775 and AV/C digital control  
(see “Using analog-compatible IEEE-1394 devices” below).  
Your TV can serve as the control center for many devices  
that are compatible with EIA-775 or AV/C IEEE-1394  
control standards (described below).  
The TV cannot control IEEE-1394 devices that use any other  
control standards.  
From IEEE-1394  
devices (such as  
AVHD or D-VHS)  
Two bi-directional  
IEEE-1394 ports  
TV back panel  
CableCARD™  
EJECT  
TheaterNet  
IEEE1394  
EIA-775 digital control allows tuning devices (such as  
Cable boxes) to send simple graphics; however, this  
standard does not allow the TV to control the Cable box  
through IEEE-1394.  
1
ANT1  
(CABLE)  
IN  
2
AUDIO  
HDMI IN  
ANT2  
OUT 1  
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
R
L
Y
Y
(
)
ANT 75  
OUT 2  
AV/C (audio/video control) provides basic control (such  
as power, play, stop rewind, fast-forward, pause, and  
record), as applicable to the specific device.  
P
B
R
P
B
TheaterNet  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VAR  
AUDIO  
P
P
L
R
L/  
L/  
L/  
MONO  
MONO  
MONO  
L
L
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
G-LINK  
R
COLOR  
STREAM STREAM  
HD-1 HD-2  
COLOR  
VIDEO  
1
VIDEO  
2
Using TheaterNeton-screen device  
control  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
OUT  
IN  
Using analog-compatible IEEE-1394  
devices  
You can use the TheaterNet feature to control some IEEE-1394  
devices using on-screen control icons. See page 44 for details on  
setting up and using the TheaterNet feature.  
Some digital IEEE-1394 devices are compatible with analog  
signals. For example, some D-VHS VCRs can record and play  
VHS or S-VHS format videos. Such devices allow you to play  
analog tapes that you rented or recorded, or record analog  
programs from antenna or Cable TV systems. To use the  
IEEE-1394 device’s analog features, you need to connect the  
device to the TV using standard A/V cables (or S-video plus  
audio cables) in addition to connecting the IEEE-1394 cable.  
Note: If the TheaterNet feature does not control your  
IEEE-1394, you can try using IR pass-through with the TV’s  
remote control (page 21) or use the device’s remote control.  
Note: If you have an IEEE-1394 device connected to both  
digital and analog inputs on the TV, the TV automatically  
switches between analog and digital modes, as needed, when  
the initial device access is initiated using the TheaterNet button.  
See page 44 for details on using the TheaterNet feature.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
22  
HM94(E)012-25(2B-Cnct)  
22  
8/31/04, 12:53 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 2: Connecting your TV  
Connecting IEEE-1394 video devices (continued)  
Connecting an AVHD (external hard  
drive) or D-VHS digital recorder  
IEEE-1394 device initialization  
When you connect a new IEEE-1394 device to the TV and turn  
it on, the device immediately announces its presence to the TV  
(and other networked IEEE-1394 devices, if any), and the  
following device initialization screen automatically appears.  
You can connect an IEEE-1394 compatible D-VHS or AVHD  
(audio/video hard drive) digital recorder (such as Toshiba’s  
Symbio160HD4 AVHD) to record high definition and  
standard definition material from either tuner and control live  
TV (pause, rewind, etc.).  
When you connect a D-VHS or AVHD device to the TV:  
• The remote control keys (LIVE, REW, PAUSE, PLAY, FF,  
etc.) are automatically activated to allow control of live TV.  
Note: With some devices, it may take up to one minute  
• The TV Guide On Screen system is automatically configured  
to allow recording to the device.* See Chapters 5 and 7 for  
details. Also see page 49 for details on setting the AVHD  
device skip time.  
for this screen to appear.  
1. If you have connected your IEEE-1394 device to an analog  
input also, use the yzx • buttons to select the input in  
the ANALOG INPUT USED field; otherwise, leave it set  
to “None.” (See “Using analog-compatible IEEE-1394  
devices” on page 22.)  
• Some programs may not be recorded due to copy protection  
restrictions.  
2. If you want to label the device, highlight EDIT LABEL and  
press ENTER.  
This TV is compatible with the new Toshiba  
Symbio  
Audio/Video Hard Drive Recorder!  
Toshiba’s Symbio model 160HD4 is an audio/video hard drive  
(AVHD) recorder designed specifically for high definition  
television (HDTV). The Symbio AVHD recorder offers control  
over digital video recording and playback. Think of it as a  
“tapeless VCR” for digital television. You can pause, rewind, or  
use instant replay, so you’ll never miss a thing. However, unlike a  
traditional VCR, where you wait for a program to finish recording  
before you start watching it, the Symbio AVHD recorder allows  
you to “pause live TV. For example, you can pause, rewind, and  
play back a program while it is being recorded. Since there is no  
tape to rewind, you can view a program that started recording  
20 minutes ago, even while it is still recording.  
3. Press the yzx • buttons to select a character for the first  
space and then press ENTER.  
4. Repeat step 3 to enter the rest of the characters.  
5. Highlight SAVE and press ENTER to save the information.  
Note:  
• The TV may not recognize non-A/V or non-compatible  
IEEE-1394 devices; however, these devices may still be available  
to other compatible IEEE-1394 devices on the network.  
Symbio also offers one-touch recording* of both standard and  
High Definition programs through the no-fee TV Guide On Screen  
You may be able to use the TV’s remote control to operate some  
compatible IEEE-1394 devices. You must first program the  
remote control to recognize the device (see Chapter 3). If you  
have an IEEE-1394 Cable box or satellite receiver, you may  
need to use the remote control that came with the device.  
interactive program guide built in to this TV.  
___________  
*If you are connecting a Symbio AVHD recorder, in order to use its full  
functionality, you must first set up the TV Guide On Screen system (see  
Chapter 5).  
Toshiba is not liable for the operation of any IEEE-1394 device  
other than the Toshiba Symbio AVHD recorder.  
NOTE: NEVER CONNECT THIS TV  
TO A PERSONAL COMPUTER (PC).  
THIS TV IS NOT INTENDED FOR USE WITH A PC.  
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television  
programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the  
Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject  
you to civil and criminal liability.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
23  
HM94(E)012-25(2B-Cnct)  
23  
8/31/04, 12:53 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 2: Connecting your TV  
Connecting IEEE-1394 video devices (continued)  
IEEE-1394 device management  
Important information regarding  
IEEE-1394 device interconnection  
The IEEE-1394 device information is saved in the TV’s  
memory. You can edit this device information (for example, to  
edit the device name, change the analog input information, or  
delete the device information from the TV’s memory if you no  
longer use that device).  
Note:  
Do not loop the last device in the chain back to the TV.  
If the device chain is looped, the TV may not work properly with the  
other devices in the chain.  
Place devices with the slowest communication speed at  
the end of each chain. If a device with a slower communication  
speed is placed ahead of a faster device in the chain, the signal  
from the slower device will interfere with the signal from the faster  
device. To determine the communication speed of an IEEE-1394  
device, look for an “S” number near the device’s IEEE-1394  
connector. The higher the “S” number, the faster the device. If your  
device is not marked with an “S” number, look in the device’s user  
manual or call the device manufacturer’s technical support number.  
To edit the IEEE-1394 device information:  
1. Press MENU and open the SETUP menu.  
2. Highlight INSTALLATION and press ENTER. (A new set  
of INSTALLATION menu icons will appear on-screen, as  
shown in step 3 below).  
If your IEEE-1394 device has a two-position power  
switch, place the device at the end of the chain or leave  
the power switch ON at all times. If the power switch is OFF,  
it will interfere with signals from devices behind it in the chain.  
The maximum length for an IEEE-1394 cable between  
each device is 15 feet.  
3. Open the DEVICES menu, highlight IEEE-1394  
DEVICES, and press ENTER.  
• This TV is an IEEE-1394A device. The IEEE-1394B protocol is  
faster and intended to allow for longer distances between devices  
and multi-room systems. IEEE-1394A–to–IEEE-1394B converters  
(available at some electronics suppliers) may allow compatibility of  
IEEE-1394B devices with your existing IEEE-1394A devices.  
Devices  
IEE-1394 Devices  
TheaterNet Devices  
• The transmission capability of IEEE-1394 cable used with this TV  
must be S400 (400 Mbps maximum).  
DVD  
CH RTN  
Navigate  
Select  
RTN Back  
EXIT Exit  
4. Highlight the device you want to edit and press ENTER.  
5. Follow the on-screen prompts to modify the device  
information.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
24  
HM94(E)012-25(2B-Cnct)  
24  
8/31/04, 12:53 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 2: Connecting your TV  
G-LINKconnection  
This connection is necessary for the TV Guide On Screen™ system to work with your cable box to receive program listings and to  
enable TV Guide On Screen recording features with your VCR.  
Note: This connection is not necessary for AVHD or D-VHS recording devices. See pages 23 and 49 for further details.  
After you connect your devices to the TV, you will need to connect the G-LINK cable (either of the dual-wand IR blaster cables  
included with your TV) from your VCR and Cable box (if applicable) to the G-LINK jack on the TV.  
Note: TV Guide On Screen program data is available through the ANT-1 and ANT-2 antenna inputs and also  
through the VIDEO 1 inputs if you have a cable box connected to VIDEO 1. TV Guide On Screen program  
data is not available through any other inputs on this TV. See the connection information on pages 13–25.  
The G-LINK connection is necessary to enable the following features of your TV Guide On Screensystem:  
• If you have a Cable box, you need to connect the G-LINK cable from the Cable box to the G-LINK jack to receive the TV Guide  
On Screen system’s program listings for your Cable service.  
• If you have a VCR, you need to connect the G-LINK cable from the VCR to the G-LINK jack to use the TV Guide On Screen  
system’s recording features.  
Front of Cable box  
To connect to the G-LINK jack:  
1. Locate the infrared sensor on the front of your VCR or  
Cable box. The sensor is marked on some devices.*  
2. Align one of the G-LINK (IR blaster) cable’s wands about  
1 inch away from the infrared sensor on the front of the  
Front of VCR  
VCR and attach it using double-sided mounting tape.  
If you have a Cable box, attach the other wand in a similar  
manner. (See illustration at right.)  
Infrared  
sensor  
Note: If you do not have a Cable box, coil the second wand  
with a rubber band and leave it behind the TV.  
3. Plug the G-LINK (IR blaster) cable’s plug into the TV’s  
G-LINK jack.  
G-LINK (IR blaster) cable wand  
(approx. 1 inch from device)  
For details on setting up the TV Guide On Screen system:  
Back of TV  
TheaterNet  
IEEE1394  
CableCARD™  
EJECT  
See Chapter 5.  
1
ANT1  
(CABLE)  
IN  
AUDIO  
For details on using the TV Guide On Screen interactive  
program guide:  
2
HDMI IN  
ANT2  
OUT  
OUT  
1
2
S-VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
R
L
See Chapter 7.  
Y
Y
(
)
ANT 75  
PB  
PB  
TheaterNet  
*
If you cannot locate the device’s infrared sensor:  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
VAR  
AUDIO  
P
R
P
L
R
L/  
L/  
L/  
MONO  
MONO  
MONO  
L
L
1. Turn OFF the device.  
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
AUDIO  
R
G-LINK  
2. Starting at the lower left corner of the device, place the end of the  
device’s remote control (with the infrared emitter) so it touches the  
front of the device and press POWER. (Do not use the TV’s remote  
control for this step.)  
R
COLOR  
STREAM STREAM  
HD-1 HD-2  
COLOR  
VIDEO  
1
VIDEO  
2
DIGITAL  
AUDIO OUT  
OUT  
IN  
3. If the device turns on, the place the remote control touched the  
device is the location of the sensor.  
4. If the device does not turn on, move the remote control slightly to the  
right and press POWER again.  
5. Repeat step 4 until you locate the device’s infrared sensor.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
25  
HM94(E)012-25(2B-Cnct)  
25  
8/31/04, 12:53 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Using the remote control  
3
Learning about the remote control  
The buttons used for operating the TV only are described here. For a complete list of the remote  
control’s functions, see the remote control functional key chart on pages 28–29.  
POWER turns the TV on and off. Press POWER to turn on the TV. The red LED indicator on the  
TV front touchpad will be illuminated. Press POWER again to turn off the TV.  
Note: The Quick Restart setting will affect the amount of time it takes for the picture to appear  
when you turn on the TV. See page 50 for details.  
SLEEP accesses the sleep timer (page 86).  
+10  
LIGHT The first press of the LIGHT button lights the keypad and turns on the Illumination  
mode. With the Illumination mode on, pressing any other key lights the keypad for 5 seconds  
(10 seconds if you’re in programming mode). Subsequent presses of the LIGHT button toggle  
between turning the Illumination mode on and off.  
100  
ACTION  
MENU  
Channel Numbers (0–9, –/100) directly tune channels. The “” button is used to tune digital  
channels (page 68).  
INPUT selects the video input source (page 67).  
ENTER  
MODE cycles through the six device modes: TV, CBL/SAT, VCR/PVR, DVD, AUDIO1, and  
AUDIO2. The mode indicator light will remain lit for a few seconds (page 27).  
PIC SIZE cycles through the five pictures sizes: Natural, TheaterWide 1/2/3, and Full (page 70).  
TheaterNet DEVICE displays a list of available TheaterNet devices (page 44).  
TheaterNet CTRL accesses the on-screen IR device control icons (page 44).  
MENU accesses the menu system (pages 34 and 35).  
TV GUIDE opens the TV Guide On Screen system (Chapter 7).  
INFO provides detailed information on highlighted items in the TV Guide On Screen system  
(Chapter 7).  
ENTER activates highlighted items in the main menu system and the TV Guide On Screen system.  
Arrow buttons (yzx •) select or adjust programming menus.  
CH yz cycles through programmed channels when no menu is on-screen (41); functions as  
page up/down when a menu is on-screen or when the TV Guide On Screen system is open  
(Chapter 7).  
CT-90216  
VOL yz adjusts the volume level.  
EXIT closes on-screen menus and the TV Guide On Screen system.  
Note: The error message “Not  
Available” will appear if you press a  
key for a function that is not available.  
CH RTN returns to the last viewed channel (page 68), or stops the picture viewer  
slide show (page 83).  
Live returns viewing of the TV back to the live program, while continuing to record  
Remote control effective range  
to the Toshiba SymbioAVHD recorder (pages 23 and 49).  
RECALL displays TV setting information on-screen (page 87).  
MUTE reduces or turns off the sound (page 79).  
TV/VCR selects TV mode to view one program while recording another.  
Point remote control toward  
remote sensor on front of TV.  
|
|
SKIP/SEARCH SS and TT jump forward and backward one day in the TV Guide  
On Screen listings (Chapter 7).  
LIST displays the Toshiba SymbioAVHD recorder play list (if available) (page 23).  
FAV CH yz tunes to the next higher/lower favorite channel (page 43).  
VCR+ accesses the TV Guide On Screen manual recording function.  
SPLIT turns the POP feature on and off (page 73).  
16.4 ft (5m)  
PIC MODE selects the picture mode (page 76).  
FAV SCAN accesses the favorite channel search function (page 75).  
FREEZE freezes the main picture in the double-window (page 74).  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
26  
HM94(E)026-33(3-RC)  
26  
8/31/04, 1:07 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 51/57/65H94  
Chapter 3: Using the remote control  
Installing the remote control batteries  
To install the remote control batteries:  
CAUTION: Always dispose of batteries in a designated disposal location.  
Never throw batteries into a fire.  
Note:  
Batteries should always be disposed of with the  
environment in mind. Always dispose of batteries in  
accordance with applicable laws and regulations.  
1. Slide the battery cover off the back of the remote control.  
Never mix battery types or use new and used  
batteries in combination.  
When necessary to replace batteries in the remote  
control, always replace both batteries with new ones.  
Always remove batteries from remote control if they  
are dead or if the remote control is not to be used  
for an extended period of time. This will prevent  
battery acid from leaking into the battery  
compartment.  
2. Install two “AA” size alkaline batteries. Match the + and – symbols on  
the batteries to the symbols on the battery compartment.  
3. Slide the battery cover on to the remote control until the lock snaps.  
Using the remote control MODE button to control your other devices  
Your TV remote control has one dedicated TV mode and five programmable  
multi-brand modes: CBL/SAT, VCR/PVR, DVD, AUDIO 1, and AUDIO 2.  
The default device modes and programmable device modes are listed below.  
Note: The TV remote control is preprogrammed to operate most Toshiba devices.  
If you own a non-Toshiba device or a Toshiba device that the remote control is not  
preprogrammed to operate, you will need to program the remote control. See  
“Programming the remote control to operate your other devices” on page 30.  
Number (1-6)  
MODE  
+10  
100  
MODE  
1) TV  
Default device mode control (before programming)  
Toshiba TV  
ACTION  
MENU  
2) CBL/SAT Toshiba Satellite receiver  
3) VCR/PVR Toshiba VCR  
ENTER  
4) DVD  
Toshiba DVD  
5) AUDIO 1 Pioneer Audio receiver  
6) AUDIO 2 Pioneer LD  
MODE  
1) TV  
Device mode control after programming  
Toshiba TV  
Note:  
Although your new TV’s remote control includes  
codes for many devices, it may not include  
codes for some or all of the features on certain  
devices you wish to control. If you are unable to  
program the TV’s remote control to operate  
your device or some of the features on that  
device, use the device’s remote control or the  
controls on the device.  
2) CBL/SAT  
3) VCR/PVR  
4) DVD  
Multi-brand video/audio devices  
5) AUDIO 1  
6) AUDIO 2  
You can directly select the device mode by pressing the corresponding  
number button (1-6) while pressing the MODE button.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
27  
HM94(E)026-33(3-RC)  
27  
8/31/04, 1:08 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 3: Using the remote control  
Remote Control functional key chart  
Toshiba TV  
(TV)  
Cable  
Satellite  
VCR  
DVD/LD  
Receiver  
(AUDIO)  
CD  
(AUDIO)  
PVR  
(VCR)  
Key Label  
(CBL/SAT) (CBL/SAT)  
MODE  
Remote control device mode selection  
Lights the remote key, and toggles between enabled and disabled Illumination mode.*1  
LIGHT  
SLEEP  
Sleep timer ---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
Power  
---  
POWER  
Power  
Power  
Power  
Power  
Digit 1  
Digit 2  
Digit 3  
Digit 4  
Digit 5  
Digit 6  
Digit 7  
Digit 8  
Digit 9  
Digit 0  
100  
Power  
Digit 1  
Digit 2  
Digit 3  
Digit 4  
Digit 5  
Digit 6  
Digit 7  
Digit 8  
Digit 9  
Digit 0  
+10  
Power  
Power  
1
Digit 1  
Digit 2  
Digit 3  
Digit 4  
Digit 5  
Digit 6  
Digit 7  
Digit 8  
Digit 9  
Digit 0  
Digit 1  
Digit 2  
Digit 3  
Digit 4  
Digit 5  
Digit 6  
Digit 7  
Digit 8  
Digit 9  
Digit 0  
---  
Digit 1  
Digit 2  
Digit 3  
Digit 4  
Digit 5  
Digit 6  
Digit 7  
Digit 8  
Digit 9  
Digit 0  
AV input 1 Digit 1  
AV input 2 Digit 2  
AV input 3 Digit 3  
AV input 4 Digit 4  
Digit 1  
Digit 2  
Digit 3  
Digit 4  
Digit 5  
Digit 6  
Digit 7  
Digit 8  
Digit 9  
2
3
4
5
CD  
Digit 5  
Digit 6  
Digit 7  
Digit 8  
Digit 9  
6
Tuner  
Phono  
Cassette  
Aux  
7
8
9
0
---  
Digit 0, 10 Digit 0  
100/–  
– (digital  
– (sub  
---  
---  
---  
- separator)  
channel)  
INPUT  
TV/Video  
select  
TV  
TV  
TV VCR input  
TV TV  
TV ---  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
PIC SIZE  
Selects the  
TV  
image shape.  
MENU/  
ACTION  
Menu/  
Guide Menu  
---  
Action,  
Menu  
---  
Menu  
---  
---  
Menu  
TV GUIDE/SETUP TV Guide ---  
INFO/TITLE Guide Info ---  
Guide  
INFO  
---  
---  
DVD setup ---  
---  
---  
Guide  
INFO  
TITLE=  
Top menu  
---  
---  
---  
---  
TheaterNet  
Theater Net ---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
Subtitle  
Audio  
Enter  
---  
---  
ADVANCE  
---  
DEVICE/SUBTITLE Device  
TheaterNet  
CTRL/AUDIO  
Theater Net ---  
Control  
ENTER  
Enter  
---  
Enter, Select ---  
---  
---  
Enter  
y
Menu select ---  
up  
Menu select ---  
up  
Menu select ---  
up  
Menu select  
up  
z
Menu select ---  
down  
Menu select ---  
down  
Menu select ---  
down  
---  
---  
---  
---  
Menu select  
down  
x •  
Menu select ---  
left/right  
Menu select ---  
left/right  
Menu select ---  
left/right  
Menu select  
left/right  
EXIT/  
DVD CLEAR  
Exit  
---  
Exit  
---  
DVD clear ---  
---  
CH yz  
PAGE +/–  
Channel  
Channel  
Channel  
up/down  
Channel  
up/down  
---  
Channel  
up/down  
Channel  
up/down  
up/down, up/down  
Page up/down  
VOL yz  
Volume  
Volume  
Volume  
Volume  
Volume  
Volume  
Volume  
Volume  
up/down*2 up/down*2 up/down*2 up/down*2 up/down*2 up/down*2 up/down*2 up/down*2  
CH RTN/  
DVD RTN  
Previous  
channel  
Previous  
channel  
Previous  
channel  
---  
DVD  
return  
---  
---  
---  
Live  
Live  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
Live TV  
---  
RECALL  
On-screen ---  
display  
On-screen  
display  
On-screen ---  
display  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
28  
HM94(E)026-33(3-RC)  
28  
8/31/04, 1:08 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 3: Using the remote control  
Remote Control functional key chart (continued)  
Toshiba TV  
(TV)  
Cable  
Satellite  
VCR  
DVD/LD  
Receiver  
(AUDIO)  
CD  
(AUDIO)  
PVR  
(VCR)  
Key Label  
(CBL/SAT) (CBL/SAT)  
MUTE  
Sound mute*2 Sound mute*2 Sound mute*2 Sound mute*2 Sound mute*2 Sound mute*2 Sound mute*2 Sound mute*2  
SLOW/  
DIR  
x
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
Slow FWD Slow FWD ---  
---  
---  
Slow FWD  
---  
---  
Slow REW ---  
SKIP/  
SEARCH  
Skip FWD ---  
x Skip REW ---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
Skip FWD ---  
Skip REW ---  
Skip FWD ---  
Skip REW ---  
REW  
Rewind  
---  
---  
---  
---  
Rewind  
Pause  
Play  
Rewind  
Pause  
Play  
---  
---  
---  
Rewind  
Pause  
Play  
Rewind  
PAUSE/STEP Pause  
---  
Pause  
Play  
PLAY  
FF  
Play  
---  
Fast FWD ---  
---  
Fast FWD Fast FWD ---  
Fast FWD Fast FWD  
TV/VCR  
---  
---  
---  
---  
TV/SAT  
---  
TV/VCR  
---  
---  
---  
---  
Reverse  
Replay  
Stop  
DISC/AM/FM ---  
Disc shift  
Stop  
---  
AM/FM  
---  
Disc shift  
Stop  
---  
STOP  
REC  
Stop  
---  
Stop  
REC Menu ---  
(Single Click)  
---  
Record  
(Double Click)  
---  
Record  
(Double Click)  
LIST  
LIST  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
FAV CH yz  
FAV channel ---  
up/down  
+
+
VCR  
VCR  
Split  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
SPLIT  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
---  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
---  
PIC MODE  
FAV SCAN  
FREEZE  
PIC MODE  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
FAV SCAN ---  
Freeze  
---  
---  
---  
---  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
Notes:  
• “---” will send nothing.  
• “  
TV” will jump to TV.  
• “  
VCR” will jump to last active VCR or DVD. (“Last active VCR/DVD” is the mode that remains for a minimum of 5 seconds, or if  
a key is pressed in that mode.)  
*1 Backlight key is toggle. Does not send IR signal.  
*2 Volume will punch through to TV by default. When the volume is unlocked, all the devices will have their own volume if their ID has  
volume data. The AUD modes (receiver, CD) will have their own volume if volume lock is done to TV, CBL/SAT, VCR/PVR, or DVD  
mode. See “Using the volume lock feature” on page 31.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
29  
HM94(E)026-33(3-RC)  
29  
8/31/04, 1:08 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 3: Using the remote control  
Programming the remote control to operate your other devices  
Device code setup  
1. Refer to the multi-brand remote control device code table  
on pages 32–33 to find the code for the brand of your  
device.  
Searching and sampling the code  
of a device (8500)  
If you do not know the device code for a particular device, you  
can cycle the remote control through the available codes for that  
device mode and sample the functions to find the code that  
operates the target device. The keys available to be sampled,  
provided they are applicable to that mode, are POWER, 1,  
VOL y, CH y, and PLAY. Invalid keys will be ignored while in  
program mode.  
If more than one code is listed, try each one separately until  
you find the one that works.  
2. Press MODE until the Mode indicator for the device  
(CBL/SAT, VCR/PVR, DVD, AUDIO 1, AUDIO 2)  
lights up.  
3. While holding down the RECALL button, press the  
Channel Number buttons to enter the four-digit code for  
your brand of device. If a valid code is entered, the mode  
indicator will blink twice. If an invalid code is entered, the  
mode indicator will blink one long blink.  
To cycle through each available device code and sample its  
functions:  
1. Press MODE to select the mode you want to set up.  
2. While holding down RECALL, press 8 – 5 – 0 – 0.  
The remote control will enter program mode.  
4. Point the remote control at the device and press POWER to  
test the code.  
3. Point the remote control at the target device and press  
POWER (or other function buttons that are available to be  
sampled).  
If the device responds to the remote control:  
You have entered the correct code.  
4. If the device responds to the remote control:  
If the device does not respond to the remote control:  
You may have entered the wrong code. Repeat steps 3  
and 4 using another code.  
Note: In addition to POWER, confirm that all necessary keys  
on the TV remote control operate your device. If some keys  
are not operational, repeat the device code setup using  
another code (if other codes are listed for your device).  
If, after trying all listed codes, the necessary keys do not  
operate your device, use the device’s original remote control.  
Press RECALL to store the device code. The mode  
indicator will blink twice and the remote control will exit  
the program mode.  
If the device does not respond to the remote control:  
Press y, and then press POWER.  
Repeat this step until the device responds to the remote  
control, and then press RECALL.  
Note: When a search cycle is completed, the mode  
indicator will blink three times. The remote control will  
begin to cycle through the available codes again. If no key  
is pressed within 10 seconds while programming, the  
remote control will exit the program mode and return to the  
previous code.  
5. Press MODE to select the TV mode to control the TV.  
Note:  
• Although the TV remote control includes codes for many devices, it may  
not include codes for some or all of the features on certain devices you  
wish to control. If you are unable to program the TV remote control to  
operate your device or some of the features on that device, use the  
device’s remote control or the controls on the device.  
• Each time you change the batteries you will need to reprogram the  
remote control.  
POWER  
• Some newer VCRs respond to either of two codes. These VCRs have a  
switch labeled “VCR1/VCR2.” If your VCR has this kind of switch and  
does not respond to the codes for your VCR brand, set the switch to the  
other position (“VCR1” or “VCR2”) and reprogram the remote control.  
Numbers  
MODE  
+10  
100  
ACTION  
MENU  
y
ENTER  
VOL y/z  
RECALL  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
30  
HM94(E)026-33(3-RC)  
30  
8/31/04, 1:08 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 3: Using the remote control  
Programming the remote control to operate your other devices (continued)  
Using the volume lock feature (8000) Operational feature reset (8900)  
For the TV, CABLE/SAT, VCR, and DVD modes, the volume  
controls (VOL y/z and MUTE) can be locked to the selected  
device mode. This feature does not apply to the AUDIO 1 and  
AUDIO 2 modes.  
This feature clears all setup features not related to “Device code  
set up” and resets the Volume Lock to “TV.”  
To reset the features:  
While holding down the RECALL button, press 8 –9 0 – 0.  
The Mode indicator will blink two times, and then pause  
and blink two more times.  
To lock the volume controls to always control the  
CABLE/SAT device volume (for example):  
1. Repeatedly press MODE to select CABLE/SAT mode.  
2. While holding down the RECALL button, press 8 – 0 – 0 – 0.  
3. Press VOL y.  
The CABLE/SAT mode light will blink two times (locked).  
POWER  
To reset the volume controls to the original device mode:  
1. While holding down RECALL, press 8 – 0 – 0 – 0.  
2. Press VOL z.  
Numbers  
MODE  
+10  
The mode light will blink four times (unlocked).  
100  
ACTION  
MENU  
ENTER  
VOL y/z  
RECALL  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
31  
HM94(E)026-33(3-RC)  
31  
8/31/04, 1:08 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 3: Using the remote control  
Multi-brand remote control device codes  
VCRs/PVRs  
Brand  
VCRs/PVRs (cont.)  
Brand  
Cable boxes  
Brand  
Code  
Code  
Code  
PHILCO  
PHILIPS  
0100, 0111, 0145  
0131, 0124, 0127,  
0123, 0126, 0120,  
0143  
0131, 0123, 0124,  
0173  
ABC  
1124  
ADMIRAL  
AIWA  
0135  
ARCHER  
CABLEVIEW  
CITIZEN  
CURTIS  
DIAMOND  
EAGLE  
EASTERN  
GCBRAND  
GEMINI  
1132, 1125  
1105, 1132  
1122, 1105  
1112, 1113  
1124, 1132, 1125  
1129  
0127, 0132, 0181  
0129, 0114, 0115,  
0116  
0139, 0111  
0105, 0113  
0120, 0126, 0180  
0123, 0125  
0143  
AKAI  
AUDIO DYNAMIC  
BELL&HOWELL  
BROKSONIC  
CANON  
CCE  
CITIZEN  
PIONEER  
PROSCAN  
0123  
1134  
0145, 0100, 0123,  
0124, 0131, 0146,  
0101, 0102, 0133,  
0174  
0121, 0122, 0123,  
0124  
0133, 0124, 0105,  
0136, 0109, 0140,  
0127  
0133, 0145, 0100,  
0123, 0124, 0131,  
0146, 0101, 0102,  
0170, 0172, 0174,  
0176, 0183  
1132, 1105  
1122, 1143  
1119, 1124, 1125,  
1126, 1127, 1120,  
1121, 1122, 1111,  
1123, 1152  
1140, 1141, 1142,  
1145, 1118, 1112  
1103, 1124  
1103, 1104, 1105,  
1108  
0106  
0105, 0129, 0106  
0145, 0124, 0127  
0143, 0101, 0124,  
0175  
0139, 0110, 0111  
0145  
0143, 0126, 0119,  
0103, 0125, 0142,  
0120, 0118  
0105, 0108, 0109,  
0107, 0113, 0165  
0127, 0126, 0120,  
0134  
0133, 0145, 0124  
0137, 0151, 0163,  
0149, 0150, 0182  
0106  
0170, 0171, 0168,  
0134, 0156  
QUASAR  
G.I./JERROLD  
CRAIG  
CURTIS MATHES  
RADIO SHACK  
DAEWOO  
DBX  
DIMENSIA  
HAMLIN  
HITACHI  
MACOM  
RCA  
MAGNAVOX  
MEMOREX  
MOTOROLA  
1133  
EMERSON  
1119, 1124, 1125,  
1126, 1127, 1120,  
1121, 1122, 1111,  
1123, 1152  
1109, 1110, 1114,  
1151, 1153  
1128, 1129, 1130,  
1106, 1107, 1150,  
1131  
FISHER  
FUNAI  
GE  
Replay TV  
REALISTIC  
7102  
0124, 0105, 0136,  
0109, 0140, 0127  
0137, 0102, 0104,  
0133  
0163  
0139, 0126, 0120,  
0152  
GO VIDEO  
SAMSUNG  
MOVIETIME  
OAK  
PANASONIC  
PHILIPS  
GOLDSTAR  
GRADIENTE  
SAMTRON  
SANSUI  
HITACHI  
0123, 0145, 0100,  
0127, 00168  
0124, 0123  
SANYO  
SCOTT  
0105, 0109, 0113  
0101, 0102, 0104,  
0109, 0138, 0140,  
0147, 0148, 0126,  
0120  
0105, 0106, 0107,  
0108, 0100  
0135, 0136, 0167,  
0162  
0117  
0127, 0135  
0117  
0128, 0129, 0130,  
0153, 0154, 0155,  
7101  
0127  
0131, 0123, 0124,  
0127, 0178  
0127, 0168, 0177  
0106  
0139, 0110, 0111  
0139, 0110, 0127,  
0111  
0121, 0122, 0123,  
0124  
0124, 0127, 0112  
0179, 0183  
1101, 1116  
1105, 1132  
1132  
1115  
1132  
1112, 1118, 1140,  
1141, 1142, 1145,  
1149  
1134  
1137, 1132, 1105,  
1138  
PIONEER  
INSTANT REPLAY  
JENSEN  
JVC  
0139  
PULSAR  
PUSER  
RCA  
REALISTIC  
REGAL  
REGENCY  
0139, 0110, 0111,  
0134, 0157, 0158,  
0184, 0185, 7104  
0139, 0110, 0106,  
0111, 7104  
SEARS  
SHARP  
KENWOOD  
LG  
LXI  
0159  
SHINTOM  
SIGNATURE 2000  
SINGER  
0127, 0106, 0100,  
0107, 0108, 0105,  
0109  
0131, 0123, 0124,  
0173  
0139, 0110, 0111  
0106  
0124, 0109  
0138, 0140, 0147,  
0148, 0141, 0142  
0100, 0145  
0138, 0140, 0147,  
0148, 0141, 0142,  
0161, 0164  
0147, 0127, 0104  
0139, 0110, 0111,  
0134  
0124, 0123  
0128, 0121, 0135,  
0106  
0126, 0120, 0132  
0123, 0124, 0121,  
0122, 7100  
0124, 0100, 0145,  
0105, 0139, 0110,  
0111  
1105  
REMBRANT  
SAMSUNG  
SONY  
1111, 1112, 1113  
1105, 1101  
1105, 1110  
1132, 1105  
1148  
MAGNAVOX  
S.A.  
SLMARK  
MARANTZ  
MARTA  
MEMOREX  
MGA  
SV2000  
SYLVANIA  
SPRUCER  
STARGATE  
TELECAPTION  
TELEVIEW  
TEXSCAN  
TOCOM  
TOSHIBA  
UNIKA  
UNIVERSAL  
VIDEOWAY  
VIEWSTAR  
ZENITH  
1101, 1105  
1144  
SYMPHONIC  
TASHIRO  
TATUNG  
TEAC  
1135, 1136, 1147  
1104, 1146  
1132, 1125  
1122, 1132  
1106  
1129, 1130  
1117, 1100  
1100  
MINOLTA  
MITSUBISHI  
TECHNICS  
MULTITECH  
NEC  
TEKNICA  
THOMSON  
Tivo  
OLYMPIC  
OPTIMUS  
7100, 7101  
0101, 0146, 0166,  
0160  
TOSHIBA  
ZENITH/DRAKE  
SATELLITE  
ORION  
PANASONIC  
VECTOR RESEARCH 0111  
WARDS  
0135, 0136, 0109,  
0144, 0106  
0105, 0139, 0110,  
0111  
0144, 0106, 0169,  
0180  
PENNEY  
PENTAX  
YAMAHA  
ZENITH  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
32  
HM94(E)026-33(3-RC)  
32  
8/31/04, 1:08 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 3: Using the remote control  
Multi-brand remote control device codes (continued)  
Receivers (cont.)  
Brand  
DVD players  
Brand  
CD players  
Brand  
Code  
Code  
Code  
ADMIRAL  
6126  
PANASONIC  
4119, 4118, 4121  
AIWA  
3123  
AIWA  
6133, 6135  
6129  
6142, 6151  
6139  
6105, 6106  
6117  
PHILIPS  
PIONEER  
QUASAR  
4123  
APEX  
3120  
3100, 3117  
3101  
3111  
3109  
3115, 3129  
3119  
3105  
3101  
3121  
3124  
3100  
3103, 3116  
3102  
3113  
CARVER  
DENON  
EMERSON  
FISHER  
GARRARD  
HARMAN KARDON 6120, 6121, 6123,  
6119  
HITACHI  
JENSEN  
JVC  
4105, 4107, 4150  
4119, 4118, 4121  
4103, 4105, 4127,  
4131, 4130, 4149  
4103, 4111, 4139  
4134, 4137  
4122  
4138  
4112, 4113, 4111,  
4110  
4121, 4118, 4119  
4132, 4133  
DENON  
FERGUSON  
HITACHI  
JVC  
RCA  
SANSUI  
SHARP  
SONY  
SOUNDE-SIGH  
TEAC  
KENWOOD  
KONKA  
MITSUBISHI  
NORDMENDE  
ONKYO  
ORITRON  
PANASONIC  
PHILIPS  
PIONEER  
RAITE  
6107  
6134  
6140, 6141, 6145,  
6148, 6151  
6123  
6100, 6101, 6111,  
6145  
TECHNICS  
VICTOR  
YAMAHA  
KARDON  
KENWOOD  
4101, 4102  
Laser disks  
Brand  
DENON  
LXI  
6136  
6129, 6132  
6129  
6121  
6110  
6114, 6115  
6108, 6118, 6120,  
6122  
6124, 6125, 6127,  
6150  
RCA  
SABA  
SAMPO  
SAMSUNG  
SHARP  
SILVANIA  
SMC  
SONY  
3101, 3106  
3101  
3114  
3110  
3108  
3132, 3118  
3125  
3104, 3126, 3127,  
3128  
3100  
3101  
3103  
3122  
3100, 3130  
3107, 3112  
3131  
Code  
MAGNAVOX  
MARANTZ  
MCNTOSH  
NAKAMICHI  
ONKYO  
5114  
5100  
5102, 5103  
5101  
5114  
5114, 5118, 5119  
5114  
5104, 5105, 5106,  
5115  
5111  
5114  
5114  
5104, 5105, 5106,  
5115  
5114  
5112  
5114, 5117  
5113, 5116  
5107, 5108, 5109,  
5110  
5114  
5114  
HITACHI  
KENWOOD  
MAGNAVOX  
MARANTZ  
MITSUBISHI  
NEC  
OPTIMUS  
PANASONIC  
TECHNICS  
THOMSON  
TOSHIBA  
WAVE  
YAMAHA  
ZENITH  
VIALTA  
PANASONIC  
PHILIPS  
PIONEER  
QUASAR  
RCA  
6129, 6130, 6149  
6108  
PHILIPS  
6125, 6127, 6124  
6147, 6137, 6138,  
6131, 6152  
6110, 6146, 6113  
6105  
6110, 6146  
6142, 6143  
6120  
6128  
6144  
6112, 6116, 6118  
6127, 6124, 6125  
6140, 6141, 6145  
6102, 6103, 6104  
PIONEER  
PROSCAN  
QUASAR  
SANSUI  
SANYO  
SCOTT  
SHARP  
SHERWOOD  
SONY  
SOUNDE-SIGH  
TEAC  
TECHNICS  
VICTOR  
YAMAHA  
FUNAI  
3132, 3118  
RCA  
SAMSUNG  
SANYO  
SHARP  
SONY  
Satellite receivers  
Brand  
DISH  
Code  
2105, 2115, 2116,  
NETWORK(Echostar) 2117  
ECHOSTAR  
EXPRESS VU  
G.E.  
G.I.(GENERAL  
INSTRUMENT)  
GRADIENTE  
HITACHI  
HNS(Hughes)  
MAGNAVOX  
PANASONIC  
PHILIPS  
PRIMESTAR  
PROSCAN  
2105  
2105, 2115  
2106  
TEAC  
TOSHIBA  
YAMAHA  
5101  
2108  
Receivers  
Brand  
ADMIRAL  
AIWA  
2114  
2103, 2111, 2112  
2103  
2101, 2102  
2104  
2101, 2102, 2118  
2108  
Code  
4120  
4125, 4126, 4146  
4134, 4135, 4136,  
4143  
DENON  
FISHER  
GARRARD  
HARMAN KARDON 4115, 4123, 4145  
4104  
4113  
2106, 2109, 2110,  
2113  
RCA  
2106, 2109, 2110,  
2113  
2107  
JENSEN  
JVC  
4129  
4132, 4133, 4140,  
4144  
SONY  
STAR CHOICE  
TOSHIBA  
2103, 2108  
2100, 2103, 2119,  
2120, 2121, 2122,  
2123, 2124, 2125  
2101, 2102  
KENWOOD  
4100, 4108, 4141,  
4142, 4147  
4127, 4128  
4124  
4116  
4148  
4106, 4117  
4109, 4114  
4103, 4127, 4131,  
4130  
MAGNAVOX  
MARANTZ  
MCNTOSH  
MITSUBISHI  
NAKAMICHI  
ONKYO  
UNIDEN  
OPTIMUS  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
33  
HM94(E)026-33(3-RC)  
33  
8/31/04, 1:08 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Menu layout and navigation  
4
The illustrations below and on the next page provide a quick overview of your TV’s menu system.  
Main menu layout  
To open the main menus (illustrated below), press MENU on the remote control or TV front panel.  
TV Guide On Screen™  
Audio Player  
Applications Digital CC/Audio Selector  
Picture Viewer  
CableCARD [ CableCARD™ options window (available only when CableCARD is inserted) ]  
Picture Settings [ Picture Settings window ]  
Video  
Audio  
Theater Settings [ Theater Settings window ]  
Advanced Picture Settings [ Advanced Picture Settings window ]  
Audio Settings [ Audio Settings window ]  
Advanced Audio Settings [ Advanced Audio Settings window ]  
Audio Setup [ Audio Setup window ]  
Favorite Channels [ Favorite Channels window ]  
Closed Caption Mode Off / CC1 / CC2 / CC3 / CC4 / T1 / T2 / T3 / T4  
Closed Caption Advanced [ Advanced Closed Captions window ]  
Input Labeling [ Input Labeling window ]  
Preferences  
Game Mode Off / On  
Menu Language English / Français / Español  
Enable Rating Blocking Off / On  
Edit Rating Limits [ Edit Rating Limits window ]  
Channels Block [ Channels Block window ]  
Input Lock Off / Video / Video+  
Front Panel Lock Off / On  
Locks  
GameTimer™ Off / 30 Min / 60 Min / 90 Min / 120 Min  
New PIN Code  
Installation [ Installation sub-menu opens See Installation sub-menu details on next page  
Sleep Timer [ Sleep Timer window ]  
]  
On/Off Timer [ On/Off Timer window ]  
Setup  
HDMI Audio Selection HDMI 1 Auto / Digital / Analog  
Slide Show Interval 2 sec. / 5 sec. / 10 sec. / 15 sec. / 20 sec.  
AVHD Skip Time 1 min. / 3 min. / 5 min. / 15 min.  
Quick Restart On / Off  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
34  
HM94(E)034-35(4-Menus)  
34  
8/31/04, 1:11 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 4: Menu layout and navigation  
Setup / Installation menu layout (continued)  
To open the INSTALLATION menu (illustrated below): press MENU on the remote control or TV front panel, open the SETUP  
menu, select INSTALLATION, and press ENTER.  
Input Configuration [ Input Configuration window ]  
MENU / Setup / Installation  
Terrestrial  
Channel Program ANT1  
[ Scan for new channels on selected antenna ]  
}
ANT2  
Channel Add/Delete [ Terrestrial Channel Add/Delete window ]  
Signal Meter [ Signal Meter window ]  
IEEE-1394 Devices [ IEEE-1394 Device Management window ]  
Devices  
TheaterNet Devices [ TheaterNet Device Setup window ]  
TV Guide On Screen Setup Start [ Start TV Guide On Screen setup ]  
Time and Date Start Setup [ Time and Date Setup window ]  
System Status System Information [ System Information window ]  
Navigating the menu system  
You can use the buttons on the remote  
control or TV front touchpad to access and  
navigate your TV’s on-screen menu system.  
TV front touchpad  
Remote control  
• Press MENU to open the menu  
system.  
TV/VIDEO  
EXIT  
CHANNEL  
VOLUME  
MENU  
POWER  
• Use the up/down/left/right arrow  
buttons (yzx •) on the remote  
control or TV front panel to move in  
the corresponding direction in a menu.  
EXIT  
MENU  
(ENTER*)  
x
z
y
+10  
100  
ACTION  
MENU  
MENU  
*The MENU button on the TV front touchpad functions  
as the ENTER button when a menu is on-screen.  
• Press ENTER to save your menu  
settings or select a highlighted item.  
(A highlighted menu item appears in a  
different color in the menu.)  
• All menus close automatically if you do not make a selection within 60 seconds, except the  
signal meter menu, which closes automatically after 5 minutes.  
ENTER  
y
ENTER  
x
z
To close a menu instantly, press EXIT.  
EXIT  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
35  
HM94(E)034-35(4-Menus)  
35  
8/31/04, 1:11 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
TV Guide On Screensystem setup  
5
The TV Guide On Screensystem in your TV is a free  
interactive program guide that uses the information you enter  
during the following setup process to provide you with a  
channel lineup and program listings for your area. The listings  
are automatically updated several times a day.  
Configuring the location of your TV  
Screen 1: Select the TV location (USA or Canada), and then  
press ENTER.  
Note:  
You must first set up your TV according to the applicable  
connection instructions in Chapter 2.  
If you connected a Toshiba SymbioAVHD, you must perform  
the following TV Guide On Screen system setup in order to use  
the Symbios full functionality. See pages 23 and 49 for further  
details about AVHD digital recorders.  
To set up the TV Guide On Screen system:  
1. Press MENU and open the SETUP menu.  
2. Highlight INSTALLATION and press ENTER.  
Screen 2: Enter the ZIP code (U.S.A.) or postal code (Canada)  
for your location (use the Number buttons on the remote  
control for numbers and the yz buttons for letters), and  
then press ENTER. Screen 3 appears.  
3. A new set of  
Screen 3: Do you have Cable service connected?  
INSTALLATION  
menu icons appears  
on-screen (see  
If you select YES (and press ENTER), screen 4 appears.  
If you select NO (and press ENTER), screen 12 appears.  
TV Guide On Screen Setup  
Start  
illustration at right).  
Open the TV GUIDE  
ON SCREEN SETUP  
DVD  
CH RTN  
Navigate  
Select  
RTN Back  
EXIT Exit  
menu, highlight START, and press ENTER.  
4. The following screen opens. Highlight “Set up TV Guide  
On Screen now” and press ENTER to continue.  
Screen 4: Do you have a Cable box connected?  
If you select YES (and press ENTER), screen 5 appears.  
If you select NO (and press ENTER), screen 13 appears.  
5. The following screen opens. Press ENTER to continue.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
36  
HM94(E)036-39(5-TVGsetup)  
36  
8/31/04, 1:28 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5: TV Guide On Screen setup  
Setting up the TV Guide On Screen system (continued)  
Screen 5: Which TV input is your cable box plugged into?  
If you select ANT 1, screen 6 appears.  
Screen 9: To allow the TV Guide On Screen system to find the  
correct code for your brand of Cable box, tune your Cable  
box to channel 02, leave the Cable box and TV ON, and  
then press ENTER. Screen 10 appears.  
If you select VIDEO 1, screen 7 appears.  
Screen 6: Select the channel your TV is tuned to when using  
Screen 10: The TV Guide On Screen system will test the code  
for the brand of Cable box you selected. Do not press any  
keys on the TV, remote control, or Cable box until the  
testing process is completed. When testing is completed,  
screen 11 appears.  
your cable box, and then press ENTER. Screen 7 appears.  
Screen 7: The on-screen diagram shows the correct way to  
connect your Cable box to the G-LINKjack on the TV.  
Make sure the G-LINK cable is installed properly. For  
additional details, see page 25.  
Screen 11: If your Cable box tuned itself to channel 09 after  
testing, select YES and press ENTER. If you selected  
ANT 1 in screen 5, screen 13 appears. If you selected  
VIDEO 1 in screen 5, screen 12 appears.  
Press ENTER to display screen 8.  
Screen 8: Highlight your Cable box brand, and then press  
ENTER to display screen 9.  
If your Cable box did not tune itself to channel 09 after  
testing and you want to test the same code again, select  
TEST THIS CODE AGAIN and press ENTER.  
If you want to test a different code, select NO and press  
ENTER. Screen 10 appears.  
Note: Many cable boxes require testing more than one code.  
(Continued on next page)  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
37  
HM94(E)036-39(5-TVGsetup)  
37  
8/31/04, 1:28 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5: TV Guide On Screen setup  
Setting up the TV Guide On Screen system (continued)  
Screen 12: Do you have an antenna connected?  
Select either YES or NO, and then press ENTER. Screen  
13 appears.  
Screen 16: The on-screen diagram shows the correct way to  
connect your VCR to the G-LINKjack on the TV. Make  
sure the G-LINK cable is installed properly. For  
additional details, see page 25.  
Note: If you selected NO in screen 3, you must select YES in  
this screen to receive a channel lineup and program listings.  
Press ENTER to display screen 17.  
Screen 17: Select your VCR brand, and then press ENTER.  
Screen 13: Are the settings correct?  
If you select YES, screen 14 appears.  
If you select NO, screen 1 appears.  
Screen 18 appears.  
Screen 18: Turn on your VCR, insert a tape (either blank or  
previously recorded), and then press PLAY. Screen 19  
appears.  
Screen 14: Congratulations! You have completed basic  
TV Guide On Screen system setup.  
Note: Read the on-screen information regarding the amount  
of time it may take for listing information to download from  
the TV Guide On Screen service.  
Press ENTER to display screen 15.  
Screen 19: The TV Guide On Screen system will test the code  
for the brand of VCR you selected. Do not press any keys  
on the TV, remote control, or VCR until the testing process  
is completed. When testing is completed, screen 20 appears.  
Screen 15: Is a VCR connected?  
If you select YES, screen 16 appears.  
If you select NO, screen 21 appears.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
38  
HM94(E)036-39(5-TVGsetup)  
38  
8/31/04, 1:29 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5: TV Guide On Screen setup  
Setting up the TV Guide On Screen system (continued)  
Screen 20: If your VCR stopped playing the tape after testing,  
Screen 22: Congratulations! You have successfully completed  
select YES and press ENTER. Screen 21 appears.  
TV Guide On Screen system setup. Press ENTER to  
display screen 23.  
Did your VCR stop playing?  
If your VCR did not stop playing the tape after testing and  
you want to test the same code again, select TEST THIS  
CODE AGAIN and press ENTER.  
Screen 23: This screen provides helpful information on using  
your TV Guide On Screen system.  
If you want to test a different code, select NO and press  
ENTER. Screen 19 appears.  
Note: Many VCRs require testing more than one code.  
Press ENTER to exit the TV Guide On Screen setup and  
watch TV.  
Screen 21: Review the setup information displayed on your TV  
screen (an example is shown below).  
TV Guide On Screen Reminder  
The TV Guide On Screen system receives program listings  
data through your Cable or over-the-air video signal. In  
order to receive regular program listings, please remember  
to do the following:  
If the information on your TV screen is correct for your  
setup, select YES, END SETUP and press ENTER. Screen  
22 appears.  
If the information is incorrect, select NO, REPEAT  
SETUP PROCESS and press ENTER. Screen 1 appears.  
1. Leave the TV in standby mode when it is not in use  
(such as overnight or when you are not watching it)  
by turning it OFF but leaving the power cord  
plugged in.  
2. If you have a Cable box connected, leave it ON.  
3. If you have a VCR connected, turn it OFF when not  
in use. (Do not unplug the power cord.) See page 13  
for VCR connection instructions.  
4. If you have more than one Cable system in your area,  
you may be prompted to select which Cable system’s  
program data to download. If so prompted, follow the  
on-screen instructions.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
39  
HM94(E)036-39(5-TVGsetup)  
39  
8/31/04, 1:29 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting up your TV  
6
For menu navigation instructions, see Chapter 4.  
Selecting the menu language  
Configuring the antenna input  
sources  
You can choose from three different languages (English, French  
and Spanish) for the on-screen display of adjustment menus and  
messages. (The TV Guide On Screen menus are in English,  
regardless of the language selected in this menu.)  
To configure the ANT 1 and ANT 2 input sources:  
1. Press MENU and open the SETUP menu.  
2. Highlight INSTALLATION and press ENTER. (A new set  
of INSTALLATION menu icons will appear on-screen, as  
shown in step 3 below.)  
To select the menu language:  
1. Press MENU and open the PREFERENCES menu.  
2. Highlight MENU LANGUAGE and press ENTER.  
3. Highlight your preferred menu language in the menu  
sidebar and press ENTER.  
3. Open the TERRESTRIAL menu, highlight INPUT  
CONFIGURATION, and press ENTER.  
Note: The TERRESTRIAL menu may not be accessible  
(items will be “grayed out”) in some instances (for example, if  
a cable box is connected to the ANT 1 input or if one of the  
VIDEO modes is the current input during TV Guide On  
Screen setup).  
4. Press EXIT to close the PREFERENCES menu.  
Terrestrial  
Input Configuration  
Channel program  
Channel Add  
Signal Meter  
/Delete  
DVD  
CH RTN  
Navigate  
Select  
RTN Back  
EXIT Exit  
4. Press to select the input source (Cable or antenna) for the  
ANT 1 input on the TV.  
Note: If a cable box is connected to the ANT 1 input during  
TV Guide On Screen setup, the entire TERRESTRIAL menu  
will not be accessible, including the input source for ANT 1,  
which will automatically display “Cable Box.”  
5. Press z and then to select the input source (Cable or  
antenna) for the ANT 2 input on the TV, if applicable. If  
you have not connected anything to ANT 2, skip this step.  
Input Configuration  
Cable  
Antenna 1 In  
Antenna 2 In  
Antenna  
Save  
Cancel  
6. To save your new settings: Highlight SAVE and press  
ENTER.  
To revert to your original settings: Highlight CANCEL  
and press ENTER before saving.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
40  
HM94(E)040-43(6a-Setup)  
40  
8/31/04, 2:03 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 51/57/65H94  
Chapter 6: Setting up your TV  
Programming channels into the TV’s channel memory  
When you press CHANNEL y or z on the remote control or  
TV front panel, your TV will stop only on the channels stored  
in the TVs channel memory.  
4. Open the TERRESTRIAL menu, highlight CHANNEL  
PROGRAM, and press ENTER.  
5. Highlight ANT 1 or ANT 2, depending on which antenna  
input you want to program channels for, and then press  
ENTER to start automatic channel programming.  
Follow the steps below to program channels into the TVs  
channel memory.  
ANT 1  
Antenna  
Programming channels automatically  
Scanning channels,please wait ...  
Terrestrial  
Input Configuration  
39%  
Your TV can automatically detect all active channels in your  
area and store them in its memory. After the channels are  
programmed automatically, you can manually add or erase  
individual channels.  
Channel program  
Abort  
Channel Add  
Signal Meter  
/Delete  
DVD  
CH RTN  
Navigate  
Select  
RTN Back  
EXIT Exit  
Note:  
The TV will automatically cycle through all the channels  
for the antenna input you selected, and store all active  
channels in the channel memory. While the TV is cycling  
through the channels, the message Scanning channels,  
please waitappears (as shown above right).  
You must configure the antenna input sources before  
programming channels (see page 40).  
• The automatic channel programming process does NOT erase  
channels that were previously programmed into the TV’s  
memory, but adds newly found channels to the existing set of  
programmed channels. To remove a channel from the memory,  
you must manually delete it (see next page).  
To cancel channel programming, either press EXIT or  
highlight ABORT in the on-screen display and press  
ENTER.  
To tune the TV to a channel not programmed in the channel  
memory, you must use the Channel Number buttons on the  
remote control.  
6. When channel programming is done, press  
CHANNEL y or z to view the programmed channels.  
(Continued on next page)  
• Programming channels for an antenna input configured for  
CABLE will take substantially longer than for an antenna input  
configured for ANTENNA. This is normal; however, once  
channel programming is completed, you should not have to  
repeat the programming process again unless your Cable TV  
service lineup changes significantly.  
• If you have a CableCARD inserted (page 12), channel  
programming for ANT 1 is disabled because the CableCARD  
automatically loads the Cable channel list in the TV’s channel  
memory.  
Channel  
Numbers  
+10  
100  
ACTION  
MENU  
To program channels automatically:  
1. Make sure you have configured the antenna input sources.  
See page 40 for details.  
ENTER  
2. Press MENU and open the SETUP menu.  
3. Highlight INSTALLATION and press ENTER. (A new set  
of INSTALLATION menu icons will appear on-screen.  
y
z
CHANNEL  
TV front touchpad  
TV/VIDEO  
EXIT  
CHANNEL  
VOLUME  
MENU  
POWER  
CHANNEL z  
/
y
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
41  
HM94(E)040-43(6a-Setup)  
41  
8/31/04, 2:03 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 51/57/65H94  
Chapter 6: Setting up your TV  
Programming channels into the TV’s channel memory (continued)  
Manually adding and deleting channels  
in the channel memory  
After you have programmed the channels automatically, you can  
manually add or delete individual channels in the channel  
memory.  
To add a channel to the channel memory:  
Highlight the unchecked box next to the channel number  
you want to add, and then press ENTER to check the box.  
To manually add digital subchannels on a physical channel:  
To add or delete channels in the channel memory:  
Use the Channel Numbers and the Dash (/100) on the  
remote control to enter the channel number (for example,  
561).  
1. Press MENU and open the SETUP menu.  
2. Highlight INSTALLATION and press ENTER. (A new set  
of INSTALLATION menu icons will appear on-screen, as  
shown in step 3).  
If the channel is found, the number will be added to the list  
and the box will be checked.  
If the channel is not found, a message will appear.  
To remove a channel from the channel memory:  
Highlight the checked box next to the channel number you  
want to remove, and then press ENTER to uncheck the  
box.  
To save your new settings:  
Highlight SAVE and press ENTER.  
3. Open the TERRESTRIAL menu, highlight CHANNEL  
ADD/DELETE, and then press ENTER.  
To revert to your original settings:  
Highlight CANCEL and press ENTER before saving.  
Note: If you have a cable box connected to ANT 1 during  
TV Guide On Screen setup, the TERRESTRIAL menu will not  
be accessible and you must then use the TV Guide  
On Screen channel editor to add/delete channels.  
To remove all channels from the channel memory:  
Highlight CLEAR ALL and press ENTER, and then  
highlight SAVE and press ENTER.  
Note:  
Terrestrial  
Input Configuration  
Channel program  
Channel Add  
Signal Meter  
• This action applies to the current antenna input only.  
To delete/add channels on the other input, highlight  
CHANGE ANTENNA and press ENTER.  
/Delete  
• This action cannot be cancelled unless you highlight  
CANCEL and press ENTER before saving your changes.  
DVD  
CH RTN  
Navigate  
Select  
RTN Back  
EXIT Exit  
4. The illustration below shows channels programmed for the  
ANT 1 antenna input. To view the list of channels  
programmed for the ANT 2 antenna input, highlight  
CHANGE ANTENNA and press ENTER.  
Channel Add/Delete  
Channel  
Signal  
Analog  
Analog  
Analog  
Analog  
Analog  
Analog  
Analog  
Antenna  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Change Antenna  
Clear All  
Channel Add/Delete  
Save  
Channel  
Signal  
Analog  
Analog  
Analog  
Analog  
Analog  
Analog  
Analog  
Antenna  
Cancel  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Change Antenna  
Clear All  
Save  
Cancel  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
42  
HM94(E)040-43(6a-Setup)  
42  
8/31/04, 2:03 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 51/57/65H94  
Chapter 6: Setting up your TV  
Programming your favorite channels  
You can program a maximum of 18 of your favorite channels  
(9 from the ANT 1 input and 9 from the ANT 2 input) into the  
Favorite Channels sets (two sets of nine favorite channels). You  
can then scan through your favorite channels only, skipping  
other channels you do not normally watch.  
To clear your favorite  
channel lists:  
1. Press MENU and  
open the  
To add and delete channels in the Favorite Channels lists:  
PREFERENCES  
menu.  
1. Press MENU and open the PREFERENCES menu.  
2. Highlight FAVORITE CHANNELS and press ENTER.  
3. Highlight EDIT and press ENTER.  
2. Highlight  
FAVORITE CHANNELS and press ENTER.  
3. Highlight EDIT and press ENTER.  
4. Highlight CLEAR ALL and press ENTER.  
5. Highlight SAVE and press ENTER.  
To tune your favorite channels for the current ANT input:  
Press FAV CH yz.  
Note: To tune your favorite channels for the other antenna  
input, you will need to change the Input Selection to the other  
ANT mode first.  
4. To add the channel to the Favorite Channels set:  
Use the yzx • buttons to highlight an unchecked box  
next to a channel you want to set as a favorite, and then  
press ENTER to check the box.  
To quickly scan through your favorite channels in a nine-  
picture multi-window (for the current ANT input):  
To delete the channel from the Favorite Channels set:  
Highlight a checked box and press ENTER to uncheck it.  
Press FAV SCAN. See page 75 for details.  
Note:  
To tune to a channel from the FAV SCAN mode, highlight a  
window (will be outlined with a green border) and press ENTER.  
To scan your favorite channels for the other antenna input, you will  
need to change the Input Selection to the other ANT mode first.  
If you try to add more  
than 9 favorite channels  
per antenna input, an  
error message appears.  
You will need to  
deselect a channel  
before you can add  
another.  
Channel Numbers  
Dash (–)  
+10  
100  
ACTION  
MENU  
5. When done, highlight SAVE and press ENTER.  
y
z
x
ENTER  
6. To program favorite channels for the other antenna input:  
Either... Highlight ANT 1 or ANT 2, which will change the  
favorite channel settings in the selected input. (This will  
not change the TVs current input.)  
Or... Press INPUT to select ANT 1 or ANT2, and then  
repeat steps 16.  
FAV CH yz  
FAV SCAN  
CT-90216  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
43  
HM94(E)040-43(6a-Setup)  
43  
8/31/04, 2:04 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 51/57/65H94  
Chapter 6: Setting up your TV  
Setting up and using TheaterNeton-screen device control  
The TheaterNet feature allows you to control many brands of  
IEEE-1394 and/or infrared remote-controlled A/V devices  
through your TV using on-screen control icons and the TV’s  
remote control.  
4. Open the DEVICES menu, highlight THEATER NET  
DEVICES, and then press ENTER.  
Devices  
IEE-1394 Devices  
Note:  
• Although the TheaterNet on-screen device control feature includes  
codes for many devices, it may not include codes for some or all of  
the features on certain devices you wish to control. If you are unable  
to program the TheaterNet feature to operate your device or some of  
the features on that device, use the device’s remote control or the  
controls on the device.  
TheaterNet Devices  
DVD  
CH RTN  
Navigate  
Select  
RTN Back  
EXIT Exit  
The TheaterNet Setup menu opens.  
TheaterNet Setup  
• For IR pass-through device control information, see “Connecting  
infrared remote-controlled devices to the IR OUT jack” on page 21.  
Select device  
type, brand,  
and IR code  
from owners  
manual.  
Video 1  
VCR  
Input  
Type  
Toshiba  
0000  
Brand  
IR List  
Setting up TheaterNet  
Test  
IR Code  
0
0
0
0
Exit  
Save  
Reset  
All device types except IEEE-1394 require the following setup  
process before you can control them using the TheaterNet  
on-screen icons.  
5. Using the x • buttons, select the INPUT the device is  
connected to.  
Note: When the input is changed, all unsaved settings  
will be lost.  
All Compatible IEEE-1394 devices are automatically recognized  
by the TheaterNet feature and do not require setup.  
Note: See page 22 for details about the IEEE-1394 ports. If your  
IEEE-1394 device is not recognized through the IEEE-1394 port or  
through the TheaterNet feature, it may be possible to set it up for IR  
pass-through control as an infrared device (see page 21).  
6. Press z and then x • to select the device TYPE.  
7. Press z and then x • to select the device BRAND.  
Note: When selecting a new brand, the IR code will be set  
to zero.  
To set up TheaterNet device control:  
8. Press z and then x • to select the device’s IR code.  
1. Make sure you have properly connected your infrared  
remote-controlled device(s). See page 21 for details.  
9. If the desired IR code is found, skip to step 10.  
If the desired IR code is not in the list, press z and use the  
Channel Number buttons to enter the device IR code.  
2. Press MENU and open the SETUP menu.  
3. Highlight INSTALLATION and press ENTER. (A new set  
of INSTALLATION menu icons will appear on-screen, as  
shown in step 4).  
Note: You can find the IR code for your device in the  
on-screen list or in the TheaterNet device code table on  
pages 46–48.  
10. Highlight TEST and press ENTER to test whether the  
device responds to the code.  
If the device does not respond to the code, repeat steps  
8 and 9 using another code for the same device.  
11. When done, highlight SAVE and press ENTER.  
To remove a device from TheaterNet:  
1. Follow steps 1–5 above.  
2. Highlight RESET and press ENTER.  
3. Highlight SAVE and press ENTER.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
44  
HM94(E)044-51(6b-Setup)  
44  
8/31/04, 2:09 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 51/57H94  
(E)
5
(
1
E/)5
4
7
6
/
6
/5
2
H
/
9
6
3
2
HM94  
Chapter 6: Setting up your TV  
Setting up and using TheaterNeton-screen device control (continued)  
Using the TheaterNet control icons  
1. Set up your infrared devices in TheaterNet, if you have not  
already done so (see page 44).  
The following are examples of the TheaterNet on-screen  
control icons for various devices.  
Note: IEEE-1394 devices do not need to be set up in  
TheaterNet because they appear automatically in the  
TheaterNet menu (as shown in step 3 below).  
Toshiba Symbio™ AVHD recorder control*  
2. Press DEVICE on the remote control to display the device  
control selection screen.  
*If you connected a Toshiba SymbioAVHD recorder, you  
must set up the TV Guide On Screen system in order to use  
the Symbio’s full functionality See Chapter 5 for details on  
setting up the TV Guide On Screen system. See pages 23  
and 49 for further details about AVHD digital recorders.  
+10  
100  
ACTION  
MENU  
DVD  
DEVICE  
CTRL  
ENTER  
VCR  
3. Using the yzx • buttons, highlight the device you want  
to control and press ENTER.  
TheaterNet  
0
2
4
1
3
5
1394  
Cable  
Video 1  
Brandname  
IEEE-1394 DVHS  
Video 3  
ColorStream HD1  
Toshiba  
Brandname  
Video 2  
Toshiba  
ColorStream HD2  
Brandname  
SAT  
4. The input automatically changes to the input for the  
selected device and the device’s control icons display.  
Audio Receiver  
MUTE  
VOL  
INPUT  
Highlight the icon for the function you want to control  
and press ENTER.  
To select the device’s control icons directly:  
Press CTRL.  
To close the on-screen control icons:  
Press EXIT.  
To view another source:  
Press DEVICE and select the input source you want to  
view.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
45  
HM94(E)044-51(6b-Setup)  
45  
8/31/04, 2:09 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 6: Setting up your TV  
TheaterNetIR device codes  
Amplifiers  
Cable boxes (cont.)  
CD players (cont.)  
Brand  
Code  
0406  
0674  
0269  
0300  
0160  
0078  
0892  
0331  
0892  
0269  
0165  
0269  
0892, 0321, 0269  
0264  
Brand  
Code  
Brand  
Proton  
QED  
Code  
Aiwa  
Bose  
Carver  
Curtis Mathes  
Denon  
RadioShack  
Regal  
Rembrandt  
Runco  
0015  
0020, 0273, 0279  
0011  
0157  
0157  
Quasar  
RCA  
0029  
0000  
1062, 0032, 0053,  
0179, 0305, 0468,  
0764  
Samsung  
Scientific Atlanta  
0144  
GE  
0877, 0008, 0017,  
0477, 1877  
0015  
Harman/Kardon  
JVC  
Left Coast  
Linn  
Luxman  
Magnavox  
Marantz  
NEC  
Nakamichi  
Optimus  
Panasonic  
Parasound  
Philips  
Pioneer  
Polk Audio  
RCA  
Realistic  
Sansui  
Shure  
Sony  
Soundesign  
Technics  
Victor  
Realistic  
Rotel  
SAE  
0179, 0180, 0420  
0157, 0420  
0157  
Signal  
Signature  
sony  
0011  
1006  
Sansui  
Sanyo  
0157, 0305  
0179  
Starcom  
Stargate  
Starquest  
Supercable  
Tocom  
0003, 0015  
0015  
0015  
0276  
0012  
Scott  
0305  
Sears  
0305  
Sharp  
0861, 0037, 0180  
1067, 0180  
0157  
0490, 0000, 0100,  
0185, 0604, 1364  
0145  
0321  
Sherwood  
Sonic Frontiers  
Sony  
0395, 0300  
0308, 0521  
0246  
0892, 0269  
0013, 0300  
0892, 0269  
0300  
0395  
0321  
0264  
0689, 0220  
0078, 0211  
0308, 0521  
0331  
0078, 0013, 0211  
0354, 0133  
Torx  
0003  
Toshiba  
Tusa  
0000  
0015  
United Artists  
Zenith  
0007  
0000, 0525, 0899  
Soundesign  
TDK  
1208  
Tascam  
Teac  
0420  
0174, 0180, 0393,  
0420  
CD players  
Brand  
Aiwa  
Code  
0157, 0124  
0420  
Technics  
Victor  
0029, 0303  
0072  
Burmester  
Wards  
Yamaha  
0157, 0053  
0888, 0036, 0187,  
1292  
California Audio Labs 0029, 0303  
Carver  
0157, 0179, 0437  
Classic  
1297  
Yorx  
0461  
DKK  
0000  
Wards  
Yamaha  
DMX Electronics  
Denon  
Emerson  
Fisher  
0157  
0873, 0003  
0305  
0174, 0179, 1325  
1296  
Laser disk players  
Brand  
Aiwa  
Code  
0203  
Cable boxes  
Brand  
ABC  
GPX  
Carver  
Denon  
Disco Vision  
Funai  
0064, 0194, 0323  
0059, 0172  
0023  
Code  
0003, 0008, 0014,  
0007, 0011, 0017  
0899  
0014  
0899  
0019  
0476  
0015  
Garrard  
Genexxa  
Harman/Kardon  
Hitachi  
JVC  
0393, 0420  
0032, 0305  
0157, 0173  
0032  
0072, 1294  
1318, 1372, 1373  
0681, 0826, 0626,  
0028, 0037, 0190  
1317  
0203  
Americast  
Bell & Howell  
Bell South  
Contec  
Director  
Everquest  
Gemini  
General Instrument 0476, 0003, 0276,  
0011, 0810  
GoldStar  
Hamlin  
Hitachi  
Hytex  
Harman/Kardon  
Hitachi  
0194  
0023  
KLH  
Kenwood  
Magnavox  
Marantz  
Mitsubishi  
NAD  
0194, 0217  
0064, 0194  
0059  
Koss  
0059  
0015  
Krell  
0157  
Optimus  
Panasonic  
Philips  
Pioneer  
Polk Audio  
Quasar  
0059  
0204  
0064, 0194  
0059, 0023  
0194  
LXI  
0305  
Linn  
0157  
0144  
0009, 0020, 0273  
0011  
0007  
0015  
0476, 0003, 0276,  
0012, 0014, 0015,  
0011, 0810  
0000  
0476, 1106, 0276,  
0810  
0019, 0007  
0237  
0000, 0107  
0000  
MCS  
0029  
MTC  
Magnavox  
Marantz  
0420  
0157, 0305  
0626, 0029, 0157,  
0180  
0204  
Realistic  
Samsung  
Sega  
0203  
0323  
0023  
Jasco  
Jerrold  
Miro  
0000  
Mission  
NSM  
0157  
0157  
Sony  
0193, 0201  
0204  
0194  
Technics  
Theta Digital  
Yamaha  
Memorex  
Motorola  
Nikko  
Onkyo  
Optimus  
0174  
0868, 0101  
1063, 0000, 0032,  
0037, 0145, 0179,  
0305, 0420, 0437,  
0468  
0217  
Oak  
Pace  
Panasonic  
Paragon  
Philips  
Pioneer  
Miscellaneous audio devices  
Brand  
Aiwa  
Code  
0010, 0159, 0404  
Panasonic  
Parasound  
Philips  
0029, 0303  
0420  
0626, 0157  
1063, 1062, 0032,  
0305, 0468  
0157  
Fisher  
0052  
0305, 0317  
0877, 0144, 0533,  
1877  
0000  
0000  
JVC  
0073  
Jerrold  
Scientific Atlanta  
Sony  
0520, 0459  
0460  
0010, 0159, 0576  
0459  
Pioneer  
Pulsar  
Quasar  
Polk Audio  
Starcom  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
46  
HM94(E)044-51(6b-Setup)  
46  
8/31/04, 2:09 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 51/57H94  
(E)
5
(
1
E/)5
4
7
6
/
6
/5
2
H
/
9
6
3
2
HM94  
Chapter 6: Setting up your TV  
TheaterNetIR device codes (continued)  
Video accessory (HDTV decoder)  
Receivers (cont.)  
VCRs  
Brand  
Panasonic  
Pioneer  
Princeton  
Samsung  
Sensory Science  
Sharp  
Code  
1120  
1010  
0113, 0295  
1190  
1126  
Brand  
Proscan  
Quasar  
RCA  
Code  
1254  
0039  
Brand  
Code  
0048, 0209  
0000  
0278  
0037, 0000  
0041  
0278  
0035  
0240  
0037, 0278  
0240  
Admiral  
Adventura  
Aiko  
Aiwa  
Akai  
America Action  
American High  
Asha  
Audiovox  
Beaumark  
Bell & Howell  
Broksonic  
1023, 1254, 0080,  
0531, 1390, 1609  
0181, 0195  
1295  
1089, 0189  
0801, 1251  
0186, 1286  
0491, 0502, 1653  
1058, 1258, 1158,  
0158, 0474, 1367,  
1558, 1658,1758  
0670  
1023  
1313  
0463  
1308, 1309, 1518,  
0039, 0309  
1189  
1390  
0074  
Realistic  
Samsung  
Sansui  
Sanyo  
Sharp  
1010  
Receivers  
Brand  
ADC  
Sherwood  
Sony  
Code  
0531  
1089, 1405, 0121,  
0158, 0189, 0405,  
1388, 1641  
1390  
1609  
1257  
1120  
1189  
0104  
0184, 0121, 0209,  
0002, 0479, 1479  
0072, 0278  
0037  
0035  
0081  
0278  
0037, 0278, 1278  
0072  
0037, 0047, 0240,  
0072  
0060, 0035, 0162,  
0041, 0760, 1035  
0240  
Aiwa  
Soundesign  
Stereophonics  
Sunfire  
Teac  
Technics  
CCE  
Calix  
Alco  
Anam  
Canon  
Carver  
Cineral  
Citizen  
Colt  
Apex Digital  
Arcam  
Audiotronic  
Audiovox  
Bose  
Cambridge Soundworks 1370  
Capetronic  
Carver  
Thorens  
Venturer  
Victor  
1390  
1229  
Craig  
Wards  
0014, 0080, 0158,  
0189  
0176, 0186, 1176  
0195  
Curtis Mathes  
0531  
1089, 1189, 0042,  
0189  
0195  
0195  
1136  
0080  
1250  
1104, 1160, 0004,  
1360  
0042, 1801  
0463  
0110, 0189, 0891  
1181  
0110, 1306  
0074, 1374  
1390  
Yamaha  
Yorx  
Zenith  
Cybernex  
Daewoo  
Denon  
Dynatech  
Electrohome  
Electrophonic  
Emerex  
0045, 0278, 1278  
0042  
0000  
0037  
0037  
Casio  
0857  
Clarinette  
Compaq  
Curtis Mathes  
Daewoo  
Denon  
Satellite receivers  
Brand  
0032  
Code  
0772  
0216  
1109  
1005, 0775  
1005, 0775  
0775  
Emerson  
0037, 0184, 0000,  
0121, 0043, 0209,  
0002, 0278, 0479,  
1278, 1479  
0047, 0104  
0035, 0033  
0000  
AlphaStar  
Chaparral  
Crossdigital  
DishPro  
Echostar  
Expressvu  
GE  
Fisher  
Garrard  
Harman/Kardon  
Hewlett Packard  
JBL  
Fisher  
Fuji  
Funai  
GE  
JVC  
0566  
0060, 0035, 0240,  
0760, 0807, 1035,  
1060  
0000  
0432  
0037, 0038, 1237  
0000  
0047  
0000  
0081, 0038  
0072  
KLH  
GOI  
0775  
Kenwood  
1313, 1027, 1570,  
1569, 0027, 0042,  
0186  
1366  
0181  
1798  
0189  
0195  
0039  
1089, 1189, 0189,  
0195, 0391, 0531  
1089, 1189, 0039,  
0189  
0195  
1089  
General Instrument 0869  
HTS  
Hitachi  
0775  
0819  
Garrard  
Go Video  
GoldStar  
Gradiente  
HI-Q  
Harley Davidson  
Harman/Kardon  
Harwood  
Koss  
LXI  
Lasonic  
Linn  
Lloyd’s  
MCS  
Hughes Network Systems 1142, 0749, 1749  
JVC  
0775  
Magnavox  
Memorex  
Mitsubishi  
Motorola  
Next Level  
Panasonic  
Paysat  
0724, 0722  
0724  
0749  
0869  
0869  
Magnavox  
Headquarter  
Hitachi  
0046  
0000, 0042, 0041  
0247, 0701  
0724  
Marantz  
Hughes Network Systems 0042  
Philips  
1142, 0749, 0724,  
1076, 0722, 1749  
0392  
0392, 0566, 0855,  
0143  
JVC  
Jensen  
KEC  
KLH  
0067, 0041  
0041  
0037, 0278  
0072  
0693  
0067, 0041, 0038  
0035, 0037  
0037  
0000  
0072  
0035  
0240, 0043  
0240  
0240, 0000  
1278  
Modulaire  
Musicmagic  
Nakamichi  
Onkyo  
Proscan  
RCA  
0097  
0135, 0842, 1298  
1023, 0042, 0080,  
0181, 0186, 0531,  
0670, 0738, 0801  
1518, 0039, 0309,  
0367  
Keen  
Optimus  
RadioShack  
SKY  
0869  
0856  
Kenwood  
Kodak  
LXI  
Lloyd’s  
Logik  
MEI  
MGA  
MGN Technology  
MTC  
Magnasonic  
Samsung  
Sony  
1109  
0639  
Panasonic  
Star Choice  
Toshiba  
0869  
Penney  
Philips  
0195  
0749, 0790, 1052,  
1053, 1054, 1285,  
1286, 1287, 1289,  
1749  
1089, 1189, 1269,  
0189, 0391, 1120  
1023, 0014, 0080,  
0150, 0244, 0531,  
0630, 1384  
0189  
Pioneer  
Uniden  
Zenith  
0724, 0722  
0856, 1856  
Polk Audio  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
47  
HM94(E)044-51(6b-Setup)  
47  
8/31/04, 2:09 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 6: Setting up your TV  
TheaterNetIR device codes (continued)  
VCRs (cont.)  
VCRs (cont.)  
DVD players (cont.)  
Brand  
Magnavox  
Code  
Brand  
Scott  
Code  
0184, 0045, 0121,  
0043  
0035, 0037, 0047,  
0000, 0042, 0104,  
0046, 1237  
0045  
Brand  
Hitachi  
Hiteker  
JBL  
Code  
0035, 0039, 0081,  
0000, 0149, 0563,  
1781  
0240  
0035, 0081  
0037  
0573, 0664  
0672  
0702  
Sears  
Magnin  
Marantz  
Marta  
JVC  
KLH  
0558, 0623, 0867  
0717  
Semp  
Kenwood  
0490, 0534, 0682,  
0737  
Matsushita  
Memorex  
0035, 0162, 0454  
0035, 0162, 0037,  
0048, 0039, 0047,  
0240, 0000, 0104,  
0209, 0046, 0454,  
0479, 1037, 1162,  
1237, 1262  
0042  
0067, 0043, 0807  
0035, 0048  
0000, 0072  
0104, 0067, 0041,  
0038  
Sharp  
0048, 0807, 0848  
0072  
0240  
Shintom  
Shogun  
Singer  
Sonic Blue  
Sony  
Konka  
0711, 0719, 0720,  
0721  
0072  
Koss  
0651  
0614, 0616  
0035, 0032, 0000,  
0033, 0636, 1032,  
1232  
0035, 0081, 0000,  
0043, 1781  
0000  
Lasonic  
Magnavox  
Malata  
0798  
0503, 0675  
0782  
Minolta  
Mitsubishi  
Motorola  
Multitech  
NEC  
Marantz  
Microsoft  
Mintek  
Mitsubishi  
Nesa  
0539  
0522  
0717  
0521  
Sylvania  
Symphonic  
TMK  
Tatung  
0240  
0041  
0717  
Next Base  
Norcent  
Onkyo  
Oritron  
Panasonic  
0826  
0872  
Nikko  
0037  
0240  
0035  
Teac  
Technics  
Teknika  
Thomas  
Tivo  
Toshiba  
Totevision  
Unitech  
Vector  
Vector Research  
Video Concepts  
Videomagic  
Videosonic  
Villain  
0000, 0041  
0035, 0162  
0035, 0037, 0000  
0000  
0618, 0636  
0045, 0043, 0845  
0037, 0240  
0240  
0045  
0038  
0045  
0037  
0240  
0000  
0060, 0035, 0048,  
0047, 0081, 0240,  
0000, 0042, 0072,  
0149, 0760  
Noblex  
Olympus  
Optimus  
0503, 0627  
0651  
0490, 0632, 1362,  
1462, 1490  
0503, 0539, 0646,  
0854  
1062, 0162, 0037,  
0048, 0104, 0432,  
0454, 1048, 1162,  
1262  
0184, 0209, 0002,  
0479, 1479  
1062, 0035, 0162,  
0225, 0454, 0616,  
1035, 1162, 1262  
0035, 0037, 0240,  
0042, 0038, 1035,  
1237  
Philips  
Orion  
Pioneer  
Polk Audio  
Princeton  
Proscan  
RCA  
0525, 0571, 0632  
0539  
0674  
0522  
0522, 0571, 0717,  
0822  
Panasonic  
Penney  
Rotel  
0623  
Wards  
Rowa  
0823  
Pentax  
Philco  
Philips  
0042  
Sampo  
0698  
0035, 0209, 0479  
0035, 0081, 0618,  
1081, 1181  
0037  
0067  
0081  
0240  
0060, 0760, 1060  
0072  
Samsung  
Sansui  
0573, 0820  
0695  
White Westinghouse 0209, 0072, 1278  
Sanyo  
0670  
Pilot  
XR-1000  
Yamaha  
Zenith  
0035, 0000, 0072  
0038  
0039, 0000, 0209,  
0033, 0479, 1479  
Sharp  
0630  
Pioneer  
Polk Audio  
Profitronic  
Proscan  
Protec  
Sherwood  
Shinsonic  
Sony  
Sylvania  
Technics  
Techwood  
Theta Digital  
Toshiba  
Tredex  
0633  
0533  
0533, 0864, 1533  
0675, 0821  
0490  
0692  
0571  
0503, 0695, 1045  
0800  
Pulsar  
0039  
0046  
0046  
0035, 0162, 0454,  
1035, 1162  
0060, 0240, 0042,  
0149, 0760, 0807,  
1035, 1060  
0000, 1037  
0037  
DVD players  
Brand  
Aiwa  
Apex Digital  
Quarter  
Quartz  
Quasar  
Code  
0641  
0672, 0717, 0755,  
0794, 0796, 0797,  
0830, 0856, 1100  
0736  
0655, 0662  
0571  
0695  
0521  
0784  
0490, 0634  
0591  
0591  
0670  
0522, 0717  
0699, 0769  
0715  
0651  
0717  
0582, 0702  
Urban Concepts  
XBox  
0503  
0522  
RCA  
Audiologic  
B & K  
RadioShack  
Radix  
Randex  
Blue Parade  
Broksonic  
DVD2000  
Daewoo  
Denon  
Emerson  
Enterprise  
Fisher  
GE  
GPX  
Go Video  
Gradiente  
Greenhill  
Harman/Kardon  
0037  
Realistic  
0035, 0037, 0048,  
0047, 0000, 0104,  
0046  
0614, 0616  
0039  
ReplayTV  
Runco  
STS  
Samsung  
Sanky  
0042  
0240, 0045  
0048, 0039  
0000, 0067, 0209,  
0041, 0479, 1479  
0047, 0240, 0104,  
0046  
Sansui  
Sanyo  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
48  
HM94(E)044-51(6b-Setup)  
48  
8/31/04, 2:09 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 51/57H94  
(E)
5
(
1
E/)5
4
7
6
/
6
/5
2
H
/
9
6
3
2
HM94  
Chapter 6: Setting up your TV  
Setting the AVHD device skip time  
Setting the time and date  
When you connect an external AVHD (audio/video hard drive)  
device, such as the Toshiba SymbioAVHD recorder (model  
160HD4), to one of the TV’s IEEE-1394 ports, you can use the  
AVHD device skip time feature to set the number of minutes  
the device will skip forward or backward when you press the  
SKIP buttons.  
Note: If you already set up the TV Guide On Screen system, the  
time and date were set automatically and you can skip this step.  
To set the time and date:  
1. Press MENU and open the SETUP menu.  
2. Highlight INSTALLATION and press ENTER. (A new set  
of INSTALLATION menu icons will appear on-screen, as  
shown in step 3 below.)  
Note:  
• This TV will work best with the Toshiba SymbioAVHD recorder  
(model 160HD4), for recording high definition and standard  
definition material from either tuner and for controlling live TV  
(pause/rewind/etc.). When the AVHD recorder is connected to the  
TV, the remote control keys (LIVE, STOP, REW, PAUSE, PLAY, etc.)  
are automatically activated to allow pausing of live TV.  
3. Open the TIME AND DATE menu, highlight  
START SETUP, and press ENTER.  
Time And Date  
Start Setup  
If you connect a Toshiba SymbioAVHD recorder, you must set up  
the TV Guide On Screen system in order to use the Symbio’s full  
functionality. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide  
On Screen system. See pages 23 and 49 for further details about  
AVHD digital recorders.  
DVD  
CH RTN  
Navigate  
Select  
RTN Back  
EXIT Exit  
• When you connect an AVHD (or a D-VHS) device, the TV Guide  
On Screen system is automatically configured to allow recording.  
See page 23 for device connection information. See Chapters 5  
and 7 for details about setting up and using the TV Guide On Screen  
system.  
If you have not set up the TV Guide On Screen system, the  
following screen will appear. To set the time, highlight  
TV GUIDE ON SCREEN and press ENTER. The TV  
Guide On Screen setup sequence will start, and the time  
and date will be set automatically.  
To set the AVHD device skip time:  
1. Press MENU and open the  
SETUP menu.  
Time And Date  
Your TV Guide On Screen System can provide  
accurate time and date information.  
2. Highlight AVHD SKIP  
TIME and press ENTER.  
It is recommended you set up TV Guide On Screen  
first and use it to obtain the time and date.  
Manual  
TV Guide On Screen  
Cancel  
3. Press z or y to select the  
AVHD skip time and press  
ENTER.  
Note:  
• If you highlight TV GUIDE ON SCREEN (above) to set the  
time and date through the TV Guide On Screen system and a  
power outage occurs, the time and date will be updated  
automatically when the power is restored.  
• If you highlight MANUAL (above) to set the time and date  
manually and a power outage occurs, you will lose the time  
and date settings when the power is restored.  
Setting the HDMIaudio mode  
To select the HDMI audio mode:  
• If you manually set the time and date and then perform TV  
Guide On Screen setup, the manual time and date settings  
will be overridden by the TV Guide On Screen settings.  
1. Press MENU and open the  
SET UP menu.  
2. Highlight HDMI AUDIO  
SELECTION and press  
ENTER.  
3. Press z or y to select the  
HDMI audio mode (Auto,  
Digital, or Analog) and  
press ENTER. (Auto is the recommended mode).  
See “Connecting an HDMI or a DVI device to the HDMI  
input” on page 19.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
49  
HM94(E)044-51(6b-Setup)  
49  
8/31/04, 2:09 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 6: Setting up your TV  
Viewing the CableCARDmenu  
Setting the Quick Restart feature  
A CableCARD enables you to view encrypted digital channels.  
See page 12 for connection and subscription information.  
With the Quick Restart feature set to ON, the TV stays in Low  
Power Shutdown mode for several minutes after the TV is  
turned off (see Notes below).  
After the CableCARD is inserted, a CableCARD option appears  
in the APPLICATIONS menu, with informational screens  
provided by your digital CableCARD service (see illustrations  
below).  
If the TV is turned on from Low Power Shutdown mode, the  
full picture appears immediately.  
To set the Quick Restart feature:  
CableCard Connected -- Acquiring  
channel information.  
1. Press MENU, and then press x or until the SETUP  
menu appears.  
CableCard services will only operate  
with cable signal connected to Antenna 1.  
2. Press y or z to highlight QUICK RESTART, and then  
OK  
press ENTER.  
3. A side menu will display. Highlight one of the side menu  
items and press ENTER to display the information.  
To view the CableCARD menu:  
1. Press MENU and open the APPLICATIONS menu.  
2. Highlight CableCARD and press ENTER.  
3. A side menu will display. Highlight one of the side menu  
items and press ENTER to display the information.  
Note: The CableCARD menu has no user-adjustable options  
and is for informational purposes only.  
Note:  
If Quick Restart is set to OFF and you turn off the TV, it can take  
several seconds for the picture to appear when you turn on the  
TV again.  
If Quick Restart is set to ON and you turn off the TV, the following  
will occur for a few minutes:  
• The screen (lamp) lights dimly.  
• The fans continue to run.  
This is a function of the Quick Restart Low Power Shutdown mode  
and is not a TV malfunction. If you do not prefer this, set the Quick  
Restart feature to OFF.  
When the Quick Restart feature is set to OFF, if you repeatedly turn  
the TV on and off in a short period of time, the useful service life of  
the lamp may be shorter than the average useful service life. See  
page 98.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
50  
HM94(E)044-51(6b-Setup)  
50  
8/31/04, 2:10 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 51/57H94  
(E)
5
(
1
E/)5
4
7
6
/
6
/5
2
H
/
9
6
3
2
HM94  
Chapter 6: Setting up your TV  
Viewing the digital signal meter  
Viewing the system status  
You can view the digital signal meter for ANT 1 and ANT 2  
digital TV input sources only.  
To check the system status:  
1. Press MENU and open the SETUP menu.  
To view the digital signal meter:  
2. Highlight INSTALLATION and press ENTER. (A new set  
of INSTALLATION menu icons will appear on-screen, as  
shown in step 3).  
3. Open the SYSTEM STATUS menu, highlight SYSTEM  
INFORMATION, and then press ENTER.  
1. Press MENU and open the SETUP menu.  
2. Highlight INSTALLATION and press ENTER. (A new set  
of INSTALLATION menu icons will appear on-screen, as  
shown in step 3 below.)  
System Status  
System Infomation  
DVD  
CH RTN  
Navigate  
Select  
RTN Back  
EXIT Exit  
4. Use the x • buttons to scroll through the menu bar to  
3. Open the TERRESTRIAL menu, highlight SIGNAL  
METER, and press ENTER.  
check the Product Information and Software Version.  
Terrestrial  
Input Configuration  
Channel program  
Channel Add  
Signal Meter  
/Delete  
DVD  
CH RTN  
Navigate  
Select  
RTN Back  
EXIT Exit  
To close the screen and return to the INSTALLATION  
menu: Highlight OK and press ENTER.  
4. Use the yzx • buttons to select the antenna input and  
digital channel whose signal you want to check.  
To return to normal viewing: Press EXIT.  
Note: The physical digital channel number listed in the Signal  
Meter screen may not correspond to a virtual TV channel  
number. Contact your local broadcasters to obtain the RF  
channel numbers for your local digital stations.  
Restore Factory Defaults  
To restore all settings and channels to their factory default  
values:  
Signal Meter  
1. Follow steps 1–3 above.  
Signal Locked  
2. Use the x • buttons to scroll through the menu bar to  
78  
Peak 78  
select FACTORY DEFAULTS.  
1
Antenna  
56  
Physical Digital Channel  
Virtual Digital Channel  
3. The screen below left appears. Enter your PIN code (or  
0000 if no PIN code has been set). The screen below right  
appears.  
N/A  
OK  
To close the screen and return to the TERRESTRIAL menu:  
To cancel the reset: Highlight NO and press ENTER.  
Highlight OK and press ENTER.  
To continue the reset process: Highlight YES and press  
ENTER. The TV will turn off automatically after a few  
seconds. After the TV turns off, unplug the TV power cord  
and then plug it in again to complete the restore.  
To return to normal viewing:  
Press EXIT.  
System Information  
System Information  
Factory Defaults  
Factory Defaults  
This window provides the ability to reset  
the TV settings.  
Thiwindoabiity to reset  
Press YES to confirm. After the TV  
th
turns off, unplug it and plug it  
!
Type in your PIN now (or “0000” if no PIN  
has been set) to restore settings to their  
factory default values.  
T
back in to complete the reset.  
h
Yes  
No  
fa
OK  
OK  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
51  
HM94(E)044-51(6b-Setup)  
51  
8/31/04, 2:10 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Using the TV Guide On Screen  
interactive program guide  
7
The TV Guide On Screensystem is a free, interactive,  
on-screen program guide built in to your Toshiba TV that lists  
schedules and information for TV programs in your area.  
Direct tuning—Directly tune the TV to a current program  
you want to watch by selecting it in the program guide.  
RemindersSchedule show reminders that will either display  
an on-screen notification banner or automatically tune the TV  
to the channel of the show for which you set the reminder.  
Note: Over-the-air or cable access to stations carrying TV Guide  
On Screen data is required for the TV Guide On Screen system to  
operate. TV Guide On Screen data is not provided by Toshiba America  
Consumer Products, L.L.C. (TACP); therefore, TACP is not liable for the  
content of such data. The data provider may elect to discontinue the  
service or it may cease to be (or never be) available in your area. In any  
of these circumstances, the TV Guide On Screen feature will not function.  
TACP is not liable in the event this service in unavailable or for any  
consequences arising from customers having used or not being able to  
use this service.  
Recording—Easily schedule recording of one or more  
programs.  
Note: A VCR or IEEE-1394 recording device is required for recording.  
It is recommended that you connect your devices according to the  
instructions in Chapter 2.  
Search—Search for shows by category, keyword, or  
alphabetically.  
On-screen help—The TV Guide On Screen system contains  
on-screen feature definitions and navigation instructions.  
The TV Guide On Screen system includes the following  
features:  
Streamlined on-screen assisted setup—Quickly and easily set  
up your TV Guide On Screen system using the on-screen  
prompts (see “Setting up the TV Guide On Screen system”  
below).  
To open the TV Guide On Screen system:  
• While watching TV, press  
the TV GUIDE button  
on the remote control;  
—or—  
Program listings and INFO windows—Scroll through eight  
days of TV listings and view program information such as  
rating, stereo, HDTV, new episode.  
• Press MENU, open the  
APPLICATIONS menu,  
highlight TV GUIDE  
ON SCREEN, and press  
ENTER.  
Watch TV and display TV Guide On Screen information  
simultaneously.  
Channel lineup customization—Customize your channel  
lineup so your favorite stations are listed first.  
Setting up the TV Guide On Screen system  
Follow these instructions to set up the TV Guide On Screen  
system so it can receive current program data for your area.  
1. Press MENU and open the SETUP menu.  
2. Highlight INSTALLATION and then press ENTER to  
open the INSTALLATION menus. (A new set of menu  
icons will appear on-screen, as shown in step 4 below.)  
Note: If you move the TV to a different ZIP/postal code, you will  
need to perform the TV GUIDE ON SCREEN SETUP process to  
reconfigure your TV Guide On Screen system.  
3. Open the TV GUIDE ON SCREEN SETUP menu,  
highlight START, and then press ENTER.  
If you have not already connected your antenna, cable box,  
and/or recording device, see Chapter 2 for connection  
instructions.  
Note: You must connect a VCR or an IEEE-1394 compatible  
recording device to use the TV Guide On Screen systems  
one-touch recording feature. It is recommended that you  
connect your devices according to the connection instructions  
in Chapter 2.  
TV Guide On Screen Setup  
Start  
DVD  
Navigate  
Select  
RTN Back  
EXIT Exit  
CH RTN  
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of  
television programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is  
prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the United States and  
other countries, and may subject you to civil and criminal liability.  
4. Go to Chapter 3 for instructions on completing the setup.  
Read this chapter for details on using the TV Guide  
On Screen interactive program guide.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
52  
HM94(E)052-55(7a-TVG)  
52  
8/31/04, 2:20 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen interactive program guide  
Navigating the TV Guide On Screen system  
• While watching TV, press  
the TV GUIDE button  
to enter the TV Guide  
On Screen system. The  
LISTINGS screen will  
appear with the current show  
highlighted.  
• When in the TV Guide  
On Screen system, if you press  
the TV GUIDE button from  
any screen, the TV will tune to  
the show displayed in the Video  
Window.  
• Use the arrow keys on the  
remote control (yzx •) to  
highlight any show, and then  
press ENTER to tune to that  
show.  
• Scroll left or right (x •)  
to view eight days of listings.  
• Press MENU to display a panel menu with options for the currently  
highlighted program or tile, including setting recordings and reminders.  
To access another Service screen:  
1. Press y to highlight the Service Bar.  
2. Press x or to highlight a different Service (LISTINGS, SEARCH,  
Note:  
The TV Guide On Screen menus shown in this manual are for  
illustration purposes only. The channels, programs, and  
TV Guide On Screen information as illustrated may not be  
available in your area. The options and features as illustrated  
are subject to change when updates are downloaded from the  
TV Guide On Screen service to your TV.  
SETUP, SCHEDULE, or RECORDINGS).  
3. Press z to use that Service.  
The TV Guide On Screen interactive program guide supports  
cable-ready, cable box, and digital cable services, as well as  
over-the-air broadcasts. It does not provide listings for satellite  
services.  
Note: Helpful information about each Service appears in the Info Box.  
TV Guide On Screen remote control functions  
BUTTON  
FUNCTION  
Numbers  
TV GUIDE  
• When watching TV, enters the TV Guide On Screen system and highlights the current show  
listing.  
• When in the TV Guide On Screen system, returns to watching TV and displays the show in the  
Video Window.  
– (digital  
Numbers  
• For direct channel tuning, priority ordering, and channel editing.  
• For entering digital channel numbers.  
separator)  
+10  
– (digital separator)  
MENU  
MENU  
INFO  
100  
ACTION  
MENU  
• Displays the panel menu, in which you can choose options (for example, record, remind,  
keyword).  
TV GUIDE  
ENTER  
y
INFO  
• Cycles between levels of information, as available, in a Service screen or other type of screen.  
• Makes a selection or executes an action.  
• With a currently airing show listing highlighted, returns to watching TV and tunes to the show  
channel.  
ENTER  
ENTER  
x
z
• With a future airing show listing highlighted, displays a panel menu with viewing options.  
PAGE UP/  
DOWN  
yzx •  
• Provide directional control.  
• When watching TV, y and z provide surfing through channels turned ON in the LISTINGS  
screen.  
PAGE UP/DOWN  
• When in the TV Guide On Screen system, moves from one set of screen information to the  
next, when applicable.  
|
|
SS and TT  
REC  
• When in the TV Guide On Screen system or watching TV, initiates the recording process.  
REC  
SPLIT  
• When in the TV Guide On Screen system, toggles between locking and unlocking the Video  
Window.  
SPLIT  
|
|
SS and TT  
• Jump forward and backward one day in the LISTINGS screen.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
53  
HM94(E)052-55(7a-TVG)  
53  
8/31/04, 2:20 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen interactive program guide  
Navigating the TV Guide On Screen system (continued)  
Video Window  
• When you open the  
TV Guide On Screen  
system, the current  
program appears in  
the Video Window.  
• As you scroll through  
the listings, the Video  
Window will change  
to display the selected  
program.  
Info Box  
• The lock/unlock icon indicates the status of the Video Window.  
You can set the Video Window to remain on a single channel (locked) or to  
change channels (unlocked) as you navigate through listings.  
To lock/unlock the Video Window:  
Press the SPLIT button on the remote control to toggle between locking  
and unlocking the Video Window.  
—or—  
Highlight a channel logo or the LISTINGS Service Bar Label and press  
MENU to display the option to lock/unlock the Video Window.  
Panel Menus  
• A panel menu appears:  
– when you press MENU on a highlighted tile (if additional options  
are available); or  
– when you press ENTER on a show starting in the future.  
– when you press VCR+ while watching TV (when the TV Guide On  
Screen is not open).  
• When a panel menu appears, the highlighted tile changes color to  
indicate that the panel menu relates to the tile.  
• Press  
to display help for the current panel menu.  
• Press y and z to move among the options.  
• Press x and to move to adjacent options or, if the highlight is on a  
odometer, to change the odometer choice.  
To move the highlight to the default command button, press ENTER  
from an odometer or entry box.  
To execute the action and close the panel menu, highlight the  
command button and press ENTER.  
To cancel any changes and close the panel menu:  
– press MENU; or  
– highlight Cancel and press ENTER.  
• If a panel menu contains more options than can be displayed in one  
panel, the word “more” appears at the bottom of the menu. To access  
the additional options, either scroll down using the z button or the  
PAGE UP/DOWN (CH yz) button.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
54  
HM94(E)052-55(7a-TVG)  
54  
8/31/04, 2:20 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen interactive program guide  
Navigating the TV Guide On Screen system (continued)  
Info Box  
Info Action Bar  
• An Info Box contains information about a show, Service, or Panel Ad, or  
provides general help (for example, for a panel menu).  
• An Info Box for a program in the LISTINGS screen can have up to three  
sizes: Small, Large, or “No.”  
– Press INFO on the remote control to cycle among the sizes.  
– The default Info Box size is Small. To change the default size, open the  
SETUP Service screen.  
Small Info Box  
• The Info Button icon (  
)appears on the Info Action Bar if the Info  
Box size can change and/or if there are additional Info screens. Press the  
INFO key on the remote control to change the size and/or to display  
additional Info screens.  
• In some instances, the INFO button on the remote control is used to page  
forward (for example, if there are additional pages of information in a Panel  
Ad, a Channel Ad, or help text).  
Large Info Box  
TV Guide On Screen Icons  
ICON  
NAME  
DESCRIPTION  
Info Button  
• Additional Info Box information is available, or the Info Box has additional sizes.  
Progress Bar • Elapsed time in current show.  
• Progress bar appears in LISTINGS and SEARCH and when the Info Button is pressed while watching TV.  
HDTV  
New  
• Show is presented in high-definition TV, if available.  
• Show is new (not a repeat).  
• Show is available in stereo.  
Stereo  
Dolby Digital • Show is available with Dolby Digital 5.1 audio (digital channels only).  
CC  
• Closed captioning is available for the show.  
• TV rating for the show.  
TV Rating  
Record Once • Show is set to Record Once.  
• Other frequencies are Daily (manual recording only),  
Regularly, and Weekly.  
Record Off  
• Show is set to Record but is currently Off (show remains in Schedule).  
• Show is Suspended due to a schedule conflict (show remains in Schedule).  
• Recording resumes when the conflict no longer exists.  
Record  
Suspended  
Remind Once • Show is set to Remind Once.  
• Other frequencies are Daily (manual reminding only),  
Regularly, and Weekly.  
Remind Off  
• Show is set to Remind but is currently Off (show remains in Schedule).  
Remind  
Suspended  
• Show is Suspended due to a schedule conflict (show remains in Schedule).  
• Remind resumes when the conflict no longer exists.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
55  
HM94(E)052-55(7a-TVG)  
55  
8/31/04, 2:20 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen interactive program guide  
TV Guide On Screen Services  
The TV Guide On Screen system consists of five main services: LISTINGS, SEARCH, RECORDINGS, SCHEDULE, and SETUP.  
Note: For the RECORDINGS service to display, an IEEE-1394 recording device must be connected to the television (see Chapter 2); otherwise,  
only four services display. Recording to other devices, such as a VCR, are possible from within the LISTINGS service.  
LISTINGS screen  
• Use the Number keys on the remote control to jump to a  
• When you open the TV Guide On Screen system, LISTINGS  
specific channel’s listings.  
is always the first service displayed.  
To watch a show (if on now), highlight the show and press  
ENTER.  
To display the Episode Options panel menu for a particular  
show, highlight a show and press MENU.  
• With LISTINGS highlighted in the Service Bar, press INFO  
to display a help screen. Press INFO again to close the screen.  
Episode Options panel menu  
From the Episode Options panel menu, you can choose to set a  
recording, set a reminder, or tune to the channel. The following  
are descriptions of the buttons.  
GO TO SERVICE BAR: Closes the menu, changes no  
information, and returns to the Service Bar.  
• Use the arrow keys to move the highlight within LISTINGS  
to do the following:  
TUNE TO CHANNEL / WATCH NOW: Exits the TV Guide  
On Screen system and tunes to the channel of the highlighted  
show (if the show airs in the future) or tunes to the show (if the  
show is currently airing). The button label changes according to  
whether the show is currently airing or not.  
– View eight days of show listings  
– Read show descriptions  
SET RECORDING: Displays the Record Options panel menu,  
from which you can set the show to record. For additional  
information, see “RECORDINGS screen” on page 59,  
“SCHEDULE screen” and “Record features” on page 60, and  
“Remind features” on page 63.  
SET REMINDER: Displays the Remind Options panel menu,  
from which you can set a reminder for the show. For additional  
information, see “SCHEDULE screen” and “Record features”  
on page 60, and “Remind features” on page 62.  
Tune directly to a show currently airing  
– Set a show to Remind (e.g., start time, frequency, automatic  
power ON, auto-tune TV)  
– Set a show to Record (e.g, start/end time, frequency)  
– Lock and unlock the Video Window  
CANCEL: Closes the menu, changes no information, and  
returns to the highlighted show.  
– Access panel ads and channel ads  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
56  
HM94(E)056-61(7b-TVG)  
56  
8/31/04, 2:22 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen interactive program guide  
TV Guide On Screen Services (continued)  
SEARCH screen  
• SEARCH allows you to find shows by keyword or category  
(alphabetical, HDTV, movies, sports, children, educational,  
news, variety, series).  
Example: Category search  
1. From the SEARCH screen, press z to highlight a category  
(in this example, MOVIES).  
• With SEARCH highlighted in the Service Bar, press INFO to  
display a help screen. Press INFO again to close the screen.  
2. Press z to highlight a subcategory (in this example, ALL).  
• Use the arrow keys to move the highlight within SEARCH.  
3. Press ENTER to display a list of all movies, organized by  
date and time.  
4. Highlight a show and press ENTER to watch (if on now)  
or press MENU to display the Episode Options panel  
menu. (See “Episode Options panel menu” on page 56.)  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
57  
HM94(E)056-61(7b-TVG)  
57  
8/31/04, 2:22 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen interactive program guide  
TV Guide On Screen Services (continued)  
SEARCH screen (continued)  
Example: Keyword search  
6. A list of all matching shows for that keyword is displayed.  
Keyword search lets you enter a word(s) to find a particular  
show by category or for every show title that matches.  
1. From the SEARCH screen, highlight KEYWORD, and  
then press ENTER.  
2. Highlight NEW SEARCH in the panel menu, and then  
press ENTER.  
7. Highlight a show and press ENTER to display all airings.  
Then highlight a specific listing and press ENTER to watch  
(if on now) or press MENU to display the Episode Options  
panel menu. From the Episode Options menu, you can  
choose to set a recording or reminder, or tune to the  
channel (see “Episode Options panel menu” on page 56.)  
3. The Search Options panel menu opens. Highlight  
CATEGORY, and then use the arrow keys to highlight a  
category to search (All, HDTV, Children, Sports, etc.).  
4. After highlighting a category, press z to highlight ENTER  
KEYWORD, and then press ENTER.  
The TV Guide On Screen system stores all the keywords you  
create.  
To edit or delete a keyword:  
From the SEARCH/KEYWORD screen, highlight the  
keyword you want to edit or delete, and then press MENU  
to display the Search Options panel menu, with the  
following options:  
5. The keyboard is displayed. Use the arrow keys to highlight  
a character and then press ENTER to display it. When  
finished entering all characters, highlight DONE and press  
ENTER.  
– GO TO SERVICE BAR: Closes the menu, changes no  
information, and returns to the Service Bar.  
– EDIT SEARCH: Displays the keyboard, from which you  
can change the keyword.  
– DELETE SEARCH: Displays the Confirmation panel  
menu. Select YES to delete the search or NO to close the  
panel menu.  
– CANCEL: Closes the panel menu, changes no  
information, and returns to the highlighted show.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
58  
HM94(E)056-61(7b-TVG)  
58  
8/31/04, 2:22 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen interactive program guide  
TV Guide On Screen Services (continued)  
RECORDINGS screen  
The RECORDINGS service screen displays a list of previously  
recorded or currently recording shows on an IEEE-1394  
recording device connected to the TV (see Chapter 2).  
To view a recording, you can do one of the following:  
• Highlight an episode and press ENTER to view it now. The  
episode either starts from the beginning or from where it  
was last stopped (if viewed previously).  
Note: RECORDINGS will not appear in the Service Bar unless you  
have an IEEE-1394 video recording device connected to one of the  
IEEE-1394 ports on the TV. See Chapter 2 for details.  
• Highlight an episode and press MENU to display the  
Episode Options panel menu, with the following options:  
For additional details, see “Record features” on page 60.  
– GO TO SERVICE BAR: Closes the menu, changes no  
information, and returns to the Service Bar.  
• With RECORDINGS highlighted in the Service Bar, press  
INFO to display a help screen. Press INFO again to close the  
screen.  
– RESUME: Starts from the beginning or from where it  
was last stopped (if viewed previously).  
– PLAY FROM BEGINNING: Starts from the beginning,  
even if stopped previously.  
– DELETE EPISODE: Deletes the episode from the  
RECORDINGS list and deletes the recording from the  
IEEE-1394 recording device. A Confirm panel menu  
displays. Press YES to delete the episode or NO to close  
the panel menu.  
To choose the way recordings are displayed:  
– CANCEL: Closes the panel menu, changes no  
information, and returns to the highlighted show.  
1. Highlight RECORDINGS on the Service Bar, and press  
MENU to display the Recording Options panel menu.  
2. Press yz to choose between View As and Sort By, as  
described below.  
View As: Press x • to choose between the following:  
List—Displays every recorded episode for a show (see  
example in Screen B, at right).  
Note: In List view, highlight an episode to display an Info  
Box with show information. Press MENU to display the  
Episode Options panel menu (see “Episode Options  
panel menu” on page 56).  
Screen A  
Group—Displays recorded shows without listing every  
recorded episode (see example in Screen A, at right).  
Note: In Group view, highlight a show and press ENTER  
to view a summary of all recorded shows. Press ENTER  
again to collapse the episode list.  
Screen B  
Sort By: Press x and to choose between the following:  
• Title—Displays recorded shows in alphabetical order (see  
example in Screen A, at right).  
• Date—Displays recorded shows by date and time, with  
most recent first (see example in Screen B, at right).  
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television  
programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the  
Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject  
you to civil and criminal liability.  
3. When finished, press ENTER to highlight DONE, and  
then press ENTER again to close the panel menu and  
display the recordings with the selected options.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
59  
HM94(E)056-61(7b-TVG)  
59  
8/31/04, 2:23 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen interactive program guide  
TV Guide On Screen Services (continued)  
SCHEDULE screen  
The SCHEDULE service screen allows you to review, edit, or  
delete Record and Remind events you set previously.  
Record features  
You can set a show to Record in LISTINGS, SEARCH, and  
SCHEDULE, or change Record settings for a show in  
SCHEDULE. There are three ways to set a show to Record.  
1) Set a show to Record using the REC key on the  
remote control  
Press the REC key on the remote control to record the  
show Once with current default settings (start and end  
recording on time). Each time you press REC, you change  
the Record frequency (but not the default settings) among  
Once (default), Regularly, Weekly, and Cancel.  
• With SCHEDULE highlighted in the Service Bar, press  
INFO to display a help screen. Press INFO again to close  
the screen.  
Note: The related Record icon appears on the show tile  
each time you press REC. See “Record icons,” on page 61.  
2) Set a show to Record from a panel menu  
1. Highlight a show and press MENU to display the  
Episode Options panel menu.  
2. Highlight SET RECORDING and press ENTER to  
display the Record Options panel menu.  
• Highlight an event and press MENU to display the Schedule  
Options panel menu, with the following options:  
– GO TO SERVICE BAR: Closes the menu, changes no  
information, and returns to the Service Bar.  
– WATCH NOW: Exits the TV Guide On Screen system  
and tunes to the highlighted show.  
3. Highlight the FREQUENCY field, and press x or to  
choose among Once, Regularly, Weekly, or Off.  
– DELETE RECORDING: Removes the recording from  
the schedule. A Confirm panel menu displays. Press YES  
to delete the recording or NO to close the panel menu.  
4. Highlight the START field, and press x or to choose  
in the range from 120 minutes early to 120 minutes late  
or On Time (default = On Time).  
– EDIT RECORDING: Opens a menu in which you can  
change existing recording information.  
5. Repeat step 4 for the END field.  
– SET REMINDER: Opens a menu in which you can set a  
reminder for the show (Record is not cancelled).  
6. Highlight the RECORDER field and press x or to  
choose the recording device.  
Note: For connected IEEE-1394 recording devices only.  
– CANCEL: Closes the panel menu, changes no  
information, and returns to the highlighted show.  
7. Highlight the KEEP UNTIL field and press x or to  
choose how long you want to keep the Record event.  
Note: For connected IEEE-1394 recording devices only.  
An icon identifies the event type. For more details, see “Record  
features,”at right, and “Remind features” on page 62.  
8. Press ENTER to highlight SCHEDULE RECORDING,  
and press ENTER again to close the menu.  
A Record icon for the selected frequency appears on the  
show tile. See “Record Icons” on page 61.  
Note: For connected IEEE-1394 recording devices only.  
Or highlight CANCEL and press ENTER to close the  
menu, change no information, and return to the  
highlighted show.  
Note: You can change the default values of the Record Options  
panel menu fields. See “Change default options” on page 65.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
60  
HM94(E)056-61(7b-TVG)  
60  
8/31/04, 2:23 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen interactive program guide  
TV Guide On Screen Services (continued)  
Record features (continued)  
3) Manually set a show to Record  
Record conflict  
1. Highlight SCHEDULE in the Service Bar, and press  
MENU to display the Schedule Options panel menu.  
A conflict message appears for the following reasons:  
• A show set to Record overlaps with any part of another  
show previously set to Record.  
Press yzx • to move through the options.  
Press the Number keys or yzx • to change the  
information, as necessary.  
• A show set to Record overlaps with a show previously set to  
auto-tune. (For auto-tune details, see “Remind features” on  
page 62.)  
2. Highlight NEW MANUAL RECORDING and press  
ENTER to display the Record Options panel menu.  
Select one of these options:  
3. Enter the information in the panel menu fields. For  
details, see “Set a show to Record from a panel menu” on  
the previous page.  
Note: When setting a Manual Recording, the option “Daily”  
is available instead of “Regularly.” See “Record icons,” below  
right, for a description of Record icons.  
• Record Anyway—This show will override an existing show  
set to Record or auto-tune.  
• Don’t Record This Show—Cancels the Recording.  
4. When finished entering the information in the fields,  
press ENTER to highlight SCHEDULE RECORDING,  
and press ENTER again to close the menu.  
A Record icon for the selected frequency appears on the  
show tile. See “Record Icons,” below right.  
Note: Manual recording is listed by channel number.  
Or highlight CANCEL and press ENTER to close the  
menu, change no information, and return to the  
highlighted show.  
Record icons  
Following is a description of the Record icons that will appear  
on the tile for a show set to Record.  
Recording notification banner  
• If the TV is not on, the recording occurs as scheduled.  
• Record Once  
—Records the show one time.  
• If the TV is on and you are watching the channel that is set to  
record, the recording occurs as scheduled.  
• Record Regularly  
show airs on the same channel and starts at the same time.  
—Records the show every time the  
• If the TV is on and you are watching a channel other than  
the one that is set to record, a notification banner (illustrated  
below) appears on-screen before recording starts. At that time  
you can choose to start or cancel recording.  
• Record Weekly —Records the show every time the show  
airs on the same day of the week and on the same channel,  
and starts at the same time.  
The default highlighted item in the notification banner is  
“Change channel; start recording.” If no change is made  
within 3 minutes, the notification banner will close  
automatically, the channel will change to the one set to  
record, and the recording will occur as scheduled. If you want  
to cancel the recording, select “Don’t change; cancel  
recording” in the notification banner and press ENTER.  
• Record Daily  
(Monday through Friday) that the show airs on the same  
channel and starts at the same time.  
—Records the show every weekday  
Note: This icon displays for manual recordings only.  
• Record Suspend  
—Show is Suspended due to a schedule  
conflict (show remains in Schedule).  
• Record Off  
record this show until the frequency is changed.  
—Keeps the show in the list but will not  
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television  
programs, videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibited under the  
Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject  
you to civil and criminal liability.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
61  
HM94(E)056-61(7b-TVG)  
61  
8/31/04, 2:23 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen interactive program guide  
TV Guide On Screen Services (continued)  
Remind features  
You can set a Reminder to perform the following functions:  
icon for the selected frequency appears on the show tile.  
See “Remind Icons” on page 63.  
• Automatically turn on the TV (if off) at the scheduled  
reminder time, and tune the TV to the channel of the show  
for which you set the reminder.  
Or highlight CANCEL and press ENTER to close the  
menu, change no information, and return to the  
highlighted show.  
• Automatically tune the TV, at the scheduled reminder time,  
to the channel of the show for which you set the reminder.  
2) Manually set a show Reminder  
• Display an on-screen notification banner (reminding you that  
the show is about to start), from which you can choose to  
tune the TV to the show’s channel or cancel the reminder.  
1. Highlight SCHEDULE in the Service Bar, and press  
MENU to display the Schedule Options panel menu.  
Press yzx • to move through the options.  
You can set a show reminder in LISTINGS, SEARCH, and  
SCHEDULE, or change the settings for a show reminder in  
SCHEDULE. There are two ways to set a show reminder.  
Press the Number keys or yzx • to change the  
information, as necessary.  
2. Highlight NEW MANUAL REMINDER and press  
ENTER to display the Remind Options panel menu.  
1) Set a show Reminder from a panel menu  
1. Highlight a show and press MENU to display the  
Episode Options panel menu.  
2. Highlight SET REMINDER and press ENTER to  
display the Remind Options panel menu.  
3. Enter the information in the panel menu fields. For  
details, see “Set a show reminder from a panel menu,”  
at left.  
Note: When setting a Manual Reminder, the option “Daily” is  
available instead of “Regularly.” See “Remind icons,” on the  
following page, for a description of Reminder icons.  
3. Highlight the FREQUENCY field, and press x or to  
choose among Once, Regularly, Weekly (or Daily, if  
setting a Manual Reminder), or Off.  
4. When finished entering the information in the fields,  
press ENTER to highlight SCHEDULE REMINDER,  
and press ENTER again to close the menu.  
4. Highlight the POWER ON TV field, and press x or •  
to choose either Yes (to turn on the TV automatically, if  
off, at the scheduled Reminder time) or No (default).  
A Remind icon for the selected frequency appears on the  
show tile. See “Record Icons” on the following page.  
5. Highlight the AUTO TUNE TV field, and press x or •  
to choose either Yes (to automatically tune the TV to the  
channel you are setting the Reminder for at the  
scheduled Reminder time; the TV must be on at the  
time) or No (default).  
Note: Manual reminders are listed by channel number.  
Or highlight CANCEL and press ENTER to close the  
menu, change no information, and return to the  
highlighted show.  
Note: You can change the default values of the Remind  
Options panel menu fields. See “Change default options” on  
page 65 for details.  
6. Highlight the WHEN field (to set a time for displaying  
the reminder screen), and press x or to choose in the  
range from 15 minutes early to 15 minutes late or On  
Time (default = 1 minute early).  
7. Press ENTER to highlight SCHEDULE REMINDER,  
and press ENTER again to close the menu. A Remind  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
62  
HM94(E)062-65(7c-TVG)  
62  
8/31/04, 2:32 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen interactive program guide  
TV Guide On Screen Services (continued)  
Remind features (continued)  
Remind icons  
Reminder notification banner  
Following is a description of the Remind icons that will appear  
on the tile for a show set to Remind.  
Based on your option settings, a notification banner will appear  
on-screen, if your TV is on at the scheduled Reminder time.  
At that time you can either press ENTER to hide the Reminder  
banner, or highlight the show and press ENTER to tune to  
the show.  
• Remind Once  
—Displays a show reminder one time.  
• Remind Regularly  
time the show airs on the same channel and starts at the same  
time.  
—Displays a show reminder every  
If no choice is made within 3 minutes, the notification banner  
closes automatically and completes the highlighted item (default  
is HIDE REMINDERS).  
Note: If more than two reminders are set for the same time,  
arrows appear on the Reminder notification banner. Press yz  
to highlight the shows.  
• Remind Daily  
weekday (Monday through Friday) that the show airs on the  
same channel and starts at the same time.  
—Displays a show Reminder every  
Note: This icon displays for manual reminders only.  
• Remind Suspend  
—Show is Suspended due to a  
schedule conflict (show remains in Schedule).  
Remind conflict  
A conflict message appears for the following reasons:  
• Remind Off  
display a reminder until you change the frequency.  
—Keeps the show in the list but will not  
• A show set with an auto-tune Reminder has the same start  
time as an existing auto-tune Reminder.  
• A show set with an auto-tune Reminder overlaps with a  
scheduled Recording.  
Select one of these options:  
• Auto-Tune Anyway—This show will override an existing  
show set to auto-tune.  
• Proceed, No Auto-Tune—Set the show as a Reminder but  
do not auto-tune.  
• Don’t Set This Reminder—Cancels the Reminder.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
63  
HM94(E)062-65(7c-TVG)  
63  
8/31/04, 2:32 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen interactive program guide  
TV Guide On Screen Services (continued)  
SETUP screen  
After you complete the initial TV Guide On Screen setup (as  
described in Chapter 5), you can change the following settings:  
• Change system settings  
• Change channel display  
• Change default options  
Change channel display  
This option allows you to edit channel information that appears  
in LISTINGS, including the following:  
• Reorder the position the channels appear in LISTINGS.  
• Change the “tune channel” number.  
Highlight a choice, press ENTER, and follow the on-screen  
instructions.  
Note: The “tune channel” is the channel on which you receive  
a station. For example, two viewers in the same zip code may  
receive the same station on different channel numbers,  
depending on whether they have Cable service or are using a  
cable box.  
• Switch a channel to one of the following settings:  
On (channel is always displayed in LISTINGS)  
Off (channel is never displayed in LISTINGS)  
Auto-Hide (channel is displayed in LISTINGS only  
when program information is available)  
With SETUP highlighted in the Service Bar, press INFO to  
display a help screen. Press INFO again to close the screen.  
1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE CHANNEL  
DISPLAY and press ENTER.  
2. Press ENTER again to display the Grid Options panel  
menu.  
Change system settings  
This option appears only after you have completed the initial  
TV Guide On Screen setup process (as described in Chapter 5).  
1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE SYSTEM  
SETTINGS and press ENTER.  
3. Highlight one of the options, press ENTER, and follow the  
on-screen instructions.  
2. Press ENTER again  
to display the  
Confirming Your  
Settings screen.  
3. Highlight one of the  
options, press  
ENTER, and follow  
the on-screen  
instructions.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
64  
HM94(E)062-65(7c-TVG)  
64  
8/31/04, 2:33 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7: Using the TV Guide On Screen interactive program guide  
TV Guide On Screen Services (continued)  
SETUP screen (continued)  
Change default options  
This option allows you to change default settings in the  
following categories:  
Record defaults  
1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE DEFAULT  
OPTIONS and press ENTER.  
2. Highlight RECORD DEFAULTS and press MENU to  
display the Record Defaults panel menu.  
• General Default Options  
• Record Defaults  
• Remind Defaults  
General default options  
1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE DEFAULT  
OPTIONS and press ENTER.  
3. Enter the required information in the panel menu fields  
(start time, end time, recorder choice, how long to keep a  
Record event, the quality of the recording). See “Record  
features” on page 60 for details on entering values in these  
fields.  
4. When finished, press ENTER to highlight DONE, and  
press ENTER again to close the menu and accept the  
changes (or highlight CANCEL to close the menu with  
no changes).  
2. Highlight GENERAL DEFAULT OPTIONS and press  
MENU to display the General Default Options panel  
menu.  
Remind defaults  
1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE DEFAULT  
OPTIONS and press ENTER.  
2. Highlight REMIND DEFAULTS and press MENU to  
display the Remind Defaults panel menu.  
3. Enter the following information in the panel menu fields:  
• BOX SIZE: The initial Info Box size when you open the  
TV Guide On Screen system. Choices are No, Small  
(default), Large, and Last Used.  
• BOX CYCLE: The Info Box size rotation when you press  
INFO on the remote control when the TV Guide On  
Screen system is open. Choices are No Only, Small Only,  
Large Only, No & Small, No & Large, Small & Large,  
and All (default).  
3. Enter the required information in the panel menu fields  
(power On TV, auto-tune, when to display the Remind  
screen). See “Remind features” on page 63 for details on  
entering values in these fields.  
• AUTO GUIDE: Automatic entry into the TV Guide On  
Screen system when the TV is powered on. Choices are  
On (default) and Off.  
4. When finished, press ENTER to highlight DONE, and  
press ENTER again to close the menu and accept the  
changes (or highlight CANCEL to close the menu with  
no changes).  
Note: Set the AUTO GUIDE to Off if you do not want the  
TV Guide On Screen system to open every time you turn  
on the TV.  
4. When finished, press ENTER to highlight DONE, and  
press ENTER again to close the menu and accept the  
changes (or highlight CANCEL to close the menu with no  
changes).  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
65  
HM94(E)062-65(7c-TVG)  
65  
8/31/04, 2:33 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the TV’s features  
8
Selecting the video input source to view  
To select the video input source to view:  
1. Press INPUT on the remote control or TV/VIDEO on the  
TV front panel.  
2. Press 0–7 to select the input source you want to view,  
depending on which input jacks you used for connecting your  
devices (see Chapter 2).  
Numbers  
INPUT  
+10  
The current signal source displays in the top right corner of  
the INPUT SELECTION screen.  
100  
ACTION  
MENU  
y
z
ENTER  
Note:  
• While the Input Selection screen is open, you also can use the yz  
buttons on the remote control (or the Channel yz buttons on the  
front panel) to change the input.  
CT-90216  
• While the Input Selection screen is not open, you can repeatedly  
press the INPUT button on the remote control or the TV/VIDEO  
button on the TV front panel to change the input.  
Remote control  
To select an IEEE-1394 input source, press the TheaterNet  
DEVICE button on the remote control (see page 26 & 44).  
• If an IEEE-1394 device is the current input, it will appear at the  
bottom of the Input Selection list; however, it will be removed from  
the list if the input source is changed.  
TV/VIDEO  
CHANNEL zy  
You can label the video input sources according to the specific  
devices you have connected to the TV (see next page).  
• The source can be “hidden.” See page 67 for details.  
TV/VIDEO  
EXIT  
CHANNEL  
VOLUME  
MENU  
POWER  
• If you use the TV’s remote control to start recording, you will not  
be able to change inputs during recording.  
TV front touchpad  
If you use a device other than the TV’s remote control to start  
recording and then change inputs, the recorded audio and video  
may be affected.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
66  
HM94(E)066-75(8a-UseTV)  
66  
8/31/04, 2:36 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Labeling the video input sources  
You can label each video input source according to the type of  
device you connected to each source, from the following preset  
list of labels:  
Input labeling example:  
If you connect a VCR to VIDEO 1, a DVD player to  
ColorStream HD-1, and a high definition satellite receiver to  
HDMI, and then label the video input sources accordingly (as  
shown in step 4 at left), when you press INPUT or TV/VIDEO,  
the INPUT SELECTION screen would look like the screen  
below right:  
– – (default label)  
Hide (to hide an unused input in the Input Selection window)  
Audio Receiver  
VCR  
Video Recorder  
Laser Disk  
Compact Disc  
DVD  
DTV  
Satellite/DSS  
Cable  
Input Selection screen  
with no inputs labeled  
Input Selection screen with  
inputs 1, 4, and 6 labeled,  
and input 5 hidden.  
Note:  
• If you set up devices in TheaterNet,™ the associated inputs are  
automatically labeled and cannot be relabeled until you remove  
the device from TheaterNet (see page 44).  
• If you set up a cable box in VIDEO 1, it will automatically be labeled and  
cannot be relabeled until you remove the device from the TV Guide On  
Screen setup.  
You cannot select IEEE-1394 devices through the INPUT SELECTION  
window; however, you can select and control IEEE-1394 devices  
through TheaterNet (see page 44).  
To clear the input labels:  
1. Press MENU and open the PREFERENCES menu.  
2. Highlight INPUT LABELING and press ENTER.  
3. Highlight RESET and press ENTER.  
4. Highlight SAVE and press ENTER.  
Input Labeling  
To label the video input sources:  
Video 1  
VCR  
1. Press MENU and open the PREFERENCES menu.  
2. Highlight INPUT LABELING and press ENTER.  
Video 2  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
--  
Video 3  
Color Stream HD 1  
Color Stream HD 2  
HDMI  
3. Press z or y to highlight the video source you want to  
ANT 2  
label.  
Input Labeling  
Save  
Cancel  
Reset  
Video 1  
VCR  
--  
Video 2  
--  
Video 3  
Note: Labels for devices you set up in TheaterNet will not be  
cleared until you remove the device from TheaterNet (see  
page 44). The screen above right illustrates an example of the  
Input Labeling screen after it was reset that still shows the  
VCR label for VIDEO 1 because the VCR was set up in  
TheaterNet.  
Color Stream HD 1  
Color Stream HD 2  
HDMI  
--  
--  
--  
--  
ANT 2  
Save  
Cancel  
Reset  
4. Press x or to select the desired label for that input source.  
If a particular input is not used, you can select “HIDDEN”  
as the label, which will cause that input to be “grayed out”  
in the input list and skipped over when you press the  
INPUT button on the remote control.  
Note: If you select “HIDDEN” for all of the input labels, the  
POP feature will be disabled. If you then attempt to access the  
POP feature, the message “Not available” will appear on-screen.  
5. To save the labels, highlight SAVE and press ENTER.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
67  
HM94(E)066-75(8a-UseTV)  
67  
8/31/04, 2:37 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Tuning channels  
Tuning to the next programmed channel Switching between two channels using  
Channel Return  
The Channel Return feature allows you to switch between two  
channels without entering an actual channel number each time.  
To tune to the next programmed channel:  
Press CHANNEL y or z on the remote control or TV  
front panel.  
Note:  
1. Select the first channel you want to view.  
• This feature will not work unless you program channels into the TV’s  
channel memory (see page 41).  
2. Select a second channel using the Channel Number buttons  
(and the dash (–) button if selecting a digital channel).  
• If you use the TV’s remote control to start recording, you will not  
be able to change the channel during recording.  
If you use a device other than the TV’s remote control to start  
recording and then change the channel, the recorded audio and  
video will be that of the currently tuned channel.  
3. Press CH RTN on the remote control. The previous  
channel will display.  
Each time you press CH RTN, the TV will switch back and  
forth between the last two channels that were selected.  
Note: If you press CH RTN from a non-antenna input, the TV  
will return to the last-viewed ANT input and channel.  
Using SpeedSurf to change to a  
specific programmed channel  
Switching between two channels using  
SurfLock  
Note: This feature will not work unless you program channels  
into the TV’s channel memory (see page 41).  
The SurfLock™ feature temporarily “memorizes” one channel  
in the CH RTN button, so you can return to that channel  
quickly from any other channel by pressing CH RTN.  
1. Press and hold CHANNEL y or z for a few seconds. The  
TV will enter SpeedSurf mode.  
To memorize a channel in the CH RTN button:  
Upper channels  
1. Select the channel you want to program into the CH RTN  
button.  
16  
13  
11  
7
TBS  
ESPN  
FOX  
CBS  
CNN  
Current channel (highlighted)  
4
2. Press and hold CH RTN for about 2 seconds until the  
message “Channel Memorized” appears on the screen. The  
channel has been programmed into the CH RTN button.  
Lower channels  
Channel label  
3. Continue to change channels until your desired channel is  
selected.  
2. Repeatedly press or hold CHANNEL y or z while the  
SpeedSurf mode is on-screen to scroll through the channel  
list. Release the button to display the highlighted channel.  
4. Press CH RTN. The memorized channel will be selected.  
The TV will return to the memorized channel one time only.  
Once you press CH RTN and then change channels again, the  
CH RTN button memory will be cleared and the button will  
function as Channel Return, by switching back and forth  
between the last two channels that were selected.  
Tuning to a specific channel  
(programmed or unprogrammed)  
Tuning analog channels:  
Press the Channel Number buttons (0–9) on the remote  
control. For example, to select channel 125, press 1, 2, 5.  
Channel Numbers  
Tuning digital channels:  
+10  
(dash)  
100  
ACTION  
MENU  
Press the Channel Number buttons (0–9) on the remote  
control, followed by the – (dash) button and then the  
sub-channel number.  
For example, to select digital channel 125-1,  
press 1, 2, 5, –, 1.  
ENTER  
Note: If a digital channel is not programmed—either through  
the automatic channel scan (page 41) or the channel  
add/delete function (page 42)—you will have to tune the RF  
channel using the Channel Number and Dash buttons on the  
remote control.  
CHANNEL y / z  
CH RTN  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
68  
HM94(E)066-75(8a-UseTV)  
68  
8/31/04, 2:37 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Selecting the picture size  
You can view many program formats in a variety of picture sizes—Natural,  
TheaterWide® 1, TheaterWide® 2, TheaterWide® 3, and Full—as described  
below and on the next page.  
Channel Numbers  
PIC SIZE  
The way the image displays in any of the picture sizes will vary depending on  
the format of the program you are viewing. Select the picture size that displays  
the current program the way that looks best to you. See “Notice of possible  
adverse effects on TV picture tube,” below right.  
+10  
100  
ACTION  
MENU  
To select the picture size:  
y
z
1. Press PIC SIZE on the remote control.  
ENTER  
2. While the Picture Size menu is on-screen, press the corresponding  
number button (0–4) to select the desired picture size.  
Picture Size  
0
1
2
3
4
Natural  
Theater Wide 1  
Theater Wide 2  
Theater Wide 3  
Full  
SIZE  
4
to Select  
0
-
/
Note:  
You also can repeatedly press PIC SIZE to select the desired picture size  
(or press the yz buttons on the remote control while the Picture Size screen  
is open).  
• “Full” may not be available for some program formats (will be “grayed out” in  
the Picture Size screen).  
Natural picture size  
• The image is displayed close to its originally formatted proportion. Some  
program formats will display with side bars and/or bars at the top and  
bottom.  
Natural picture size example: The way the image displays will vary  
depending on the format of the program you are currently watching.  
See “Notice of possible adverse effects on TV picture tube” at right.  
Conventional picture on a  
conventional TV screen  
Conventional picture in Natural size on  
your wide-screen TV  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
69  
HM94(E)066-75(8a-UseTV)  
69  
8/31/04, 2:37 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Selecting the picture size (continued)  
TheaterWide® 1 picture size (For 4:3 format program)  
To select the picture size, press PIC SIZE on the  
remote control.  
• The center of the picture remains close to  
its original proportion, but the left and  
right edges are stretched wider to fill the  
screen.  
You also can select the picture size using the  
menu system. Select PICTURE SIZE in the  
VIDEO / THEATER SETTINGS menu.  
Theater Wide 1 picture size example  
TheaterWide® 2 picture size (for letter box  
programs)  
• The picture is stretched wider to fill the  
width of the screen, but only slightly  
stretched taller.  
Note:  
• If you select one of the TheaterWide picture  
sizes, the top and bottom edges of the  
picture (including subtitles or captions) may  
be hidden. To view the hidden edges, either  
scroll the picture (TheaterWide 2 and 3 only)  
or try viewing the program in Full or Natural  
picture size.  
A B C D E F G - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
• The top and bottom edges of the picture  
are hidden. To view the hidden areas, see  
“Scrolling the Theater Wide picture” on  
page 71.  
• When selecting the picture size, the way  
the image displays will vary depending on  
the format of the program you are  
currently watching. See “Notice of  
possible adverse effects on TV  
picture tube” below.  
Theater Wide 2 picture size example  
TheaterWide® 3 picture size (for letter  
box programs with subtitles)  
Using these functions to change the  
picture size (i.e., changing the height/  
width ratio) for any purpose other than  
your private viewing may be prohibited  
under the Copyright Laws of the United  
States andother countries, and may  
subject you to civil and criminal liability.  
• The picture is stretched wider to fill the  
width of the screen, but only slightly  
stretched taller.  
A B C D E F G - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
• The top and bottom edges are hidden. To  
view the hidden areas (such as subtitles or  
captions), see “Scrolling the TheaterWide  
picture” on page 71.  
A B C D E F G - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
Theater Wide 3 picture size example  
Full picture size (for 16:9 [480i, 480p]  
source programs only)  
• If receiving a 4:3 format program, it is  
stretched wider to fill the width of the  
screen, but not stretched taller.  
• None of the picture is hidden.  
Full picture size example  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
70  
HM94(E)066-75(8a-UseTV)  
70  
8/31/04, 2:37 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Scrolling the TheaterWide® picture  
Using the auto aspect ratio feature  
(TheaterWide 2 and 3 only)  
When the AUTO ASPECT feature is set to ON and one of the  
following input sources is received, the picture size is  
automatically selected (as described in the table below):  
You can set separate scroll settings for TheaterWide 2 and  
TheaterWide 3 modes.  
• A 480i signal from the VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3,  
ColorStream HD-1, or ColorStream HD-2 input.  
To set the scroll settings:  
1. Press MENU and open the VIDEO menu.  
2. Highlight THEATER SETTINGS and press ENTER.  
• A 480i or 480p signal from the HDMI input.  
Automatic aspect size  
Aspect ratio  
(automatically selected  
of signal source  
when AUTO ASPECT is ON)  
Video  
Picture Settings  
Theater Settings  
Advanced Picture Settings  
4:3 normal  
4:3 letter box  
16:9 full  
Natural (with side bars)  
TheaterWide 2  
Full  
DVD  
CH RTN  
Navigate  
Select  
RTN Back  
EXIT Exit  
Not defined  
(no ID-1 data or )  
HDMI aspect data)  
User-selected picture size  
(see pages 64–65)  
3. In the PICTURE SIZE field, select either TheaterWide 2  
or TheaterWide 3 (you cannot scroll in any other mode).  
4. Press z to highlight the PICTURE SCROLL field.  
Note:  
5. Press x or to scroll the picture up and down as needed,  
• The AUTO ASPECT feature is not applicable to antenna or Cable input  
sources.  
from –10 to +20.  
• The AUTO ASPECT feature is not available when the POP  
double-window is open, the FREEZE mode is active, or the TV Guide  
On Screen system is open.  
To turn on the AUTO ASPECT feature:  
1. Press MENU and open the VIDEO menu.  
2. Highlight THEATER SETTINGS and press ENTER.  
6. To save your scroll settings temporarily, highlight DONE  
and press ENTER.  
To save your scroll settings permanently, highlight SAVE  
and press ENTER.  
Video  
Picture Settings  
Theater Settings  
Advanced Picture Settings  
DVD  
CH RTN  
Navigate  
Select  
RTN Back  
EXIT Exit  
3. In the AUTO ASPECT RATIO field, select ON.  
4. To save your settings temporarily, highlight DONE and  
press ENTER.  
To save your settings permanently, highlight SAVE and  
press ENTER.  
To turn off the AUTO ASPECT feature:  
Select OFF in step 3 above.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
71  
HM94(E)066-75(8a-UseTV)  
71  
8/31/04, 2:37 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Selecting the cinema mode  
(480i signals only)  
Selecting the lamp mode  
You can select either the HI BRIGHT or LOW POWER lamp  
mode.  
When you view a DVD (480i signal; 3:2 pulldown processed)  
from a DVD player connected to the ColorStream HD1/HD2  
(component video) or HDMI inputs on the TV, smoother  
motion can be obtained by setting the CINEMA MODE to  
FILM.  
• The HI BRIGHT mode is useful when additional picture  
brightness is desired (such as in a bright room).  
• The LOW POWER mode reduces wear on the projection  
lamp. Using this mode should result in longer lamp life.  
See “Lamp unit replacement” on page 98–100.  
To set the CINEMA MODE to FILM:  
To select the lamp mode:  
1. Press MENU and open the VIDEO menu.  
2. Highlight THEATER SETTINGS and press ENTER.  
1. Press MENU and open the VIDEO menu.  
2. Highlight THEATER SETTINGS and press ENTER.  
Video  
Picture Settings  
Theater Settings  
Video  
Advanced Picture Settings  
Picture Settings  
Theater Settings  
DVD  
CH RTN  
RTN Back  
EXIT Exit  
Advanced Picture Settings  
Navigate  
Select  
DVD  
CH RTN  
Navigate  
Select  
RTN Back  
EXIT Exit  
3. In the CINEMA MODE field, select FILM.  
3. In the LAMP MODE field, select HI BRIGHT or LOW  
POWER, whichever you prefer.  
4. To save your settings temporarily, highlight DONE and  
press ENTER.  
4. To save your settings temporarily, highlight DONE and  
press ENTER.  
To save your settings permanently, highlight SAVE and  
press ENTER.  
To save your settings permanently, highlight SAVE and  
press ENTER.  
To set the CINEMA MODE to VIDEO:  
Select VIDEO in step 3 above.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
72  
HM94(E)066-75(8a-UseTV)  
72  
8/31/04, 2:38 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Using the POP features  
Using the POP double-window feature  
The POP (picture-out-picture) double-window feature splits the screen into two  
windows so you can watch two programs at the same time.  
Note:  
• When the main window is in the ANT1 or ANT2  
mode, the ANT1 and ANT2 inputs cannot be  
selected for the POP window.  
To display a program in the POP window:  
• When the main window is in Video 1/2/3,  
ColorStream HD1/HD2, or HDMI mode, those  
inputs cannot be selected for the POP window.  
1. Select the program you want to watch in the main window.  
2. Press SPLIT to open the POP window.  
You cannot view IEEE-1394 source programs in  
the POP window.  
You cannot view two video or two antenna sources  
in both the main and POP windows simultaneously.  
(You can view a video source in one window and  
an antenna source in the other.)  
Main window  
POP window  
ANT1  
POP  
TV12  
Video1  
Green border  
(denotes active window)  
3. Press to highlight the POP window (will have a green border).  
Numbers  
4. Press INPUT to open the Pop Input Selection window. Select the input source  
for the POP window by pressing the corresponding Number button (0–7).  
The current source displays in purple in the Pop Input Selection window.  
+10  
100  
ACTION  
MENU  
INPUT  
ENTER  
To close the POP window and tune to the currently highlighted window:  
SPLIT  
Press ENTER after highlighting the window you want to view as a normal  
picture.  
To close the POP window:  
Press SPLIT or EXIT.  
Notes about recording:  
• When the POP window is open and you start recording, the POP window  
will close and recording will start.  
• If you use the TV’s remote control to start recording, you will not be able  
to open the POP window. If you attempt to do so, the message “Not  
Available” will appear on-screen.  
• It is recommended that you use the TV’s remote control to start  
recording. If you use a device other than the TV’s remote control to start  
recording, you may be able to open the POP window during the  
recording process. If this happens, the recorded audio will reflect the  
audio of the active window (main or POP), which may not be the audio  
you intended to record.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
73  
HM94(E)066-75(8a-UseTV)  
73  
8/31/04, 2:38 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Using the POP features (continued)  
Switching the speaker audio (main or POP)  
While the POP window is open, press x or to switch the sound (main or POP) that  
is output from the TV speakers (and from the VARIABLE AUDIO OUT and  
AUDIO OUT jacks).  
x
ENTER  
The window with the active sound is outlined with a green border.  
Example: Press x  
Example: Press •  
FREEZE  
CT-90216  
Freezing the main picture in the POP double-window  
1. While the POP double-window is not open, press FREEZE. The POP window  
Note: The FREEZE feature is not available  
when the POP window is already open. If you  
press FREEZE when the POP window is open,  
the message “Not available” will appear.  
will open, displaying the main picture as a still picture.  
2. Continue to press FREEZE repeatedly to refresh the still picture in the POP  
window, which acts as a slow “strobe” of the program in the main window.  
Still picture  
To close the still POP window:  
Press EXIT.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
74  
HM94(E)066-75(8a-UseTV)  
74  
8/31/04, 2:38 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Using the POP features (continued)  
POP double-window aspect ratio  
The POP double-window feature displays each picture according to its input signal  
aspect ratio, as illustrated below.  
Note:  
The AUTO ASPECT RATIO feature (page 71)  
does not operate in POP double-window mode.  
+10  
100  
ACTION  
MENU  
480i  
480i  
480p/720p/1080i  
480i  
y
z
ENTER  
x
ENTER  
Using the favorite channel scan feature  
You can use this feature to quickly scan and tune the channels you programmed as  
favorite channels in a nine-picture multi-window.  
Note: The favorite channel scan feature will not work unless you program channels into the  
favorite channel memory (see “Programming your favorite channels” on page 43).  
To scan and tune your favorite channels:  
FAV SCAN  
1. Press FAV SCAN. The TV automatically enters multi-window mode and begins a  
nine-picture scan of your favorite channels for the current ANT input.  
To view your favorite channels for the other antenna input, you will need to  
change antenna inputs first (page 67), and then press FAV SCAN.  
2
4–1  
11  
4–2  
13  
6
CABLE  
18  
31  
36  
18  
2. Press yzx • to select one of the nine pictures, which becomes a moving picture  
(the active window). (The main picture is always moving.)  
3. Press ENTER to display the channel you selected in step 2 as the main picture.  
2
4–1  
11  
4–2  
13  
6
31  
36  
18  
Notes about recording:  
• When the FAV SCAN multi-window is open and you try to start recording, the message “Not Available”  
will appear on-screen. You will not be able to start recording until you close the FAV SCAN multi-window.  
• If you use the TV’s remote control to start recording, you will not be able to open the FAV SCAN multi-  
window. If you attempt to do so, the message “Not Available While Recording” will appear on-screen.  
• It is recommended that you use the TV’s remote control to start recording. If you use a device other than  
the TV’s remote control to start recording, you may be able to open the FAV SCAN multi-window during  
the recording process. If this happens, the recorded audio and video will reflect the audio and video of the  
active window, which may not be what you intended to record.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
75  
HM94(E)066-75(8a-UseTV)  
75  
8/31/04, 2:38 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Adjusting the picture  
Selecting the picture mode  
Adjusting the picture quality  
You can select your desired picture settings from four picture  
modes, as described below.  
You can adjust the picture quality (contrast, brightness, color,  
tint, and sharpness) to your personal preferences.  
To adjust the picture quality:  
Mode  
Picture Quality  
1. Press MENU and open the VIDEO menu.  
2. Highlight PICTURE SETTINGS and press ENTER.  
Sports  
Standard  
Movie  
Bright and dynamic picture (factory setting)  
Standard picture settings (factory setting)  
Lower contrast for darkened room (factory setting)  
3. Press z or y to select the picture quality you want to adjust  
(CONTRAST, BRIGHTNESS, COLOR, TINT, or  
SHARPNESS), and then x and to adjust the setting, as  
described in the table below.  
Preference Your personal preferences  
To select the picture mode:  
ENTER  
Press PIC MODE on the remote  
control. The following popup menu  
appears on-screen.  
Picture Settings  
ANT 1  
Mode  
Sporte  
Contrast  
Brightness  
Color  
100  
50  
50  
0
Video  
Picture Settings  
Theater Settings  
Advanced Picture Settings  
Picture Settings  
Mode:Sports  
Sports  
Tint  
Sharpness  
Reset  
50  
DVD  
CH RTN  
Navigate  
Select  
RTN Back  
EXIT Exit  
Mode  
Save  
Done  
PIC  
MODE  
Repeatedly press PIC MODE  
to cycle among the modes.  
Selection  
x Pressing •  
contrast  
brightness  
color  
tint  
sharpness  
lower  
darker  
paler  
reddish  
softer  
higher  
lighter  
deeper  
greenish  
sharper  
To select the picture mode using the menu system:  
1. Press MENU and open the VIDEO menu.  
2. Highlight PICTURE SETTINGS and press ENTER.  
Picture Settings  
ANT 1  
Mode  
Sporte  
4. To temporarily save the new settings, highlight DONE and  
press ENTER. To permanently save the new settings,  
highlight SAVE and press ENTER.  
Contrast  
Brightness  
Color  
100  
50  
50  
0
Video  
Picture Settings  
Theater Settings  
Advanced Picture Settings  
Tint  
Sharpness  
50  
DVD  
CH RTN  
RTN Back  
EXIT Exit  
Note: The settings you selected are for the current input selection  
only (ANT 1 in the example above). You can select different  
settings for each input selection.  
Navigate  
Select  
Reset  
Save  
Done  
3. Press z to highlight the MODE field, and then x • to  
select the mode you prefer.  
The picture qualities you adjusted are automatically saved in the  
PREFERENCE mode (see Selecting the picture mode,above  
left).  
4. To temporarily save the mode you selected, highlight  
DONE and press ENTER.  
Note: Temporarily saved settings will apply until the  
TV is turned off or the input source is changed.  
Resetting the picture settings  
To reset the picture settings to their factory values:  
To permanently save the mode you selected, highlight  
SAVE and press ENTER.  
1. Highlight RESET in the Picture Settings menu and press  
ENTER.  
Note:  
• The picture mode you selected is for the current input  
selection only (ANT 1 in the example above). You can select  
a different picture mode for each input selection.  
2. Highlight SAVE and press ENTER.  
Note: This resets the pictures settings for the current input source only  
(ANT 1 in this example).  
• If you select one of the factory-set picture modes (SPORTS,  
STANDARD, or MOVIE) and then change a picture quality  
setting (for example, increase the contrast or change the  
color temperature), the picture mode automatically changes  
to PREFERENCE in the Picture Settings menu.  
Picture Settings  
ANT 1  
Mode  
Sporte  
Contrast  
Brightness  
Color  
100  
50  
50  
0
Tint  
Sharpness  
Reset  
50  
Save  
Done  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
76  
HM94(E)076-81(8b-UseTV)  
76  
8/31/04, 2:44 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Adjusting the picture (continued)  
Using CableClearDNR (digital  
noise reduction)  
The CableCleardigital noise reduction feature allows you to  
reduce visible interference in your TV picture. This may be  
useful when receiving a broadcast with a weak signal (especially  
a Cable channel) or playing back a video cassette or disc  
damaged by repeated use.  
Selecting the color temperature  
You can change the quality of the picture by selecting from three  
preset color temperatures: cool, medium, and warm, as  
described below.  
Mode  
Picture Quality  
cool  
blueish  
medium neutral  
warm reddish  
NOTE: The CableClear DNR feature does not function in  
HDMI (DVI), ATSC, IEEE-1394, and digital Cable modes.  
To select the color temperature:  
1. Press MENU and open the VIDEO menu.  
2. Highlight ADVANCED PICTURE SETTINGS and press  
ENTER.  
To turn on CableClear DNR:  
1. Press MENU and open the VIDEO menu.  
2. Highlight ADVANCED PICTURE SETTINGS and press  
ENTER.  
3. Press z to highlight the COLOR TEMPERATURE field,  
and then press to select the mode you prefer (COOL,  
MEDIUM, or WARM).  
3. Press z to highlight the CABLECLEAR DNR field, and  
then press to select AUTO.  
Video  
Picture Settings  
Video  
Picture Settings  
Theater Settings  
Theater Settings  
Advanced Picture Settings  
Advanced Picture Settings  
DVD  
CH RTN  
Navigate  
Select  
RTN Back  
EXIT Exit  
DVD  
CH RTN  
Navigate  
Select  
RTN Back  
EXIT Exit  
4. To temporarily save the new settings, highlight DONE and  
press ENTER.  
4. To temporarily save the new settings, highlight DONE and  
press ENTER.  
To permanently save the new settings, highlight SAVE and  
press ENTER.  
To permanently save the new settings, highlight SAVE and  
press ENTER.  
NOTE:  
• If the current input is Antenna, Video 1, Video 2, or Video 3,  
the menu will display the text “CableClear.”  
Resetting the advanced picture settings  
To reset the advanced picture settings to their factory values:  
• If the current input is ColorStream HD1 or ColorStream HD2,  
the menu will display the text “DNR.”  
1. Press MENU and open the VIDEO menu.  
• If the current input is HDMI or IEEE-1394, the menu will  
display the text “DNR” and will be “grayed out” to indicate  
that the feature does not function in this input.  
2. Highlight ADVANCED PICTURE SETTINGS and press  
ENTER.  
To turn off CableClear DNR:  
Select OFF in step 3 above.  
Video  
Picture Settings  
Theater Settings  
Advanced Picture Settings  
DVD  
CH RTN  
Navigate  
Select  
RTN Back  
EXIT Exit  
3. Highlight RESET and press ENTER.  
4. Highlight SAVE and press ENTER.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
77  
HM94(E)076-81(8b-UseTV)  
77  
8/31/04, 2:44 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Using the closed caption mode  
The closed caption mode has two options:  
Advanced closed captions  
You can customize the closed caption display characteristics by  
changing the background color and the text size, type, edge,  
and color.  
CaptionsAn on-screen display of the dialogue, narration,  
and sound effects of TV programs and videos that are  
closed captioned (usually marked CCin program guides).  
TextAn on-screen display of information not related to  
the current program, such as weather or stock data (when  
provided by individual stations).  
Note: This feature is available for digital channels only.  
To customize the closed captions:  
1. Press MENU and open the  
To view captions or text:  
PREFERENCES menu.  
1. Press MENU and open the PREFERENCES menu.  
Preferences  
Favorite Channels  
2. Highlight CLOSED  
2. Highlight CLOSED CAPTION MODE and then press  
Closed Caption Mode  
Closed Caption Advanced  
Input Labeling  
Off  
CAPTION ADVANCED  
and press ENTER.  
to open the menu sidebar.  
Menu Language  
English  
3. Press z to highlight the desired closed caption mode and  
DVD  
CH RTN  
Navigate  
Select  
RTN Back  
EXIT Exit  
3. Press z or y to highlight  
then press ENTER.  
the characteristic you want to change, and then press to  
select the format for that characteristic.  
4. To temporarily save the new  
settings, highlight CANCEL  
and press ENTER.  
Advanced Closed Captions  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Caption Size  
Caption Text Type  
Caption Text Edge  
Caption Text Color  
Caption Text Color  
To permanently save the  
new settings, highlight  
SAVE and press ENTER.  
Save  
cancel  
Reset  
To reset the closed caption characteristics:  
1. Highlight RESET in step 4 above, and press ENTER.  
To view captions:  
Highlight CC1, CC2, CC3, or CC4. (CC1 displays  
translation of the primary  
2. Highlight SAVE and press ENTER. All characteristics are  
set to AUTO.”  
language in your area.)  
Note: If the program or  
video you selected is not  
closed captioned, no captions  
Digital closed captions  
You can use the Digital CC/Audio selector to select digital  
closed caption services (if available), which will temporarily  
override closed captions for digital channels only. When such  
services are not available, the Digital CC/Audio selector presents  
a default list of services. If the selected service is not available,  
the next best service will be used instead.  
Giant pandas eat leaves.  
will display on-screen.  
To view text:  
Highlight T1, T2, T3, or T4.  
Note: If text is not available in  
your area, a black rectangle  
may appear on your screen.  
If this happens, turn the Closed  
Caption Mode OFF.  
WORLD WEATHER  
Temps  
Current  
Weather  
Clear  
Cloudy  
Clear  
F
C
LONDON  
MOSCOW  
PARIS  
ROME  
TOKYO  
51  
57  
53  
66  
65  
11  
14  
12  
19  
18  
1. Press MENU and open  
the APPLICATIONS  
menu.  
Cloudy  
Rain  
To turn off the Closed Caption feature:  
Highlight OFF.  
2. Highlight DIGITAL  
CC/AUDIO  
SELECTOR and press  
ENTER.  
Note: A closed caption signal may not display in the following situations:  
When a videotape has been dubbed  
3. Press or x to highlight  
When the signal reception is weak  
the desired service, and then press ENTER.  
When the signal reception is non-standard  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
78  
HM94(E)076-81(8b-UseTV)  
78  
9/1/04, 11:53 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Adjusting the audio  
Muting the sound  
Selecting stereo/SAP broadcasts  
Press MUTE to partially reduce (1/2 MUTE) or turn off  
(MUTE) the sound. Each time you press MUTE, the mute  
mode will change in the following order.  
The multi-channel TV sound (MTS) feature allows you to  
output high-fidelity stereo sound from your TVs speakers.  
MTS also can transmit a second audio program (SAP)  
containing a second language, music, or other audio  
information (when provided by individual stations).  
Normal 1/2 MUTE MUTE →  
If the closed caption mode is set to OFF when you select  
MUTEmode, the closed caption feature is automatically  
activated. To mute the audio without automatically activating  
the closed caption feature, use the VOL z button to set the  
volume to 0. See Using the closed caption modeon page 78  
for more information on closed caption modes.  
The MTS feature is not available when the TV is in VIDEO  
mode.  
When the TV receives a stereo or SAP broadcast, the word  
STEREOor SAPappears on-screen when RECALL is  
pressed.  
To listen to stereo sound:  
1. Press MENU and open the AUDIO menu.  
2. Highlight AUDIO SETUP and press ENTER.  
3. Press z to highlight the MTS field, and then press to  
select STEREO.  
+10  
100  
ACTION  
MENU  
Audio  
Audio Settings
Advanced Audio Settings  
AudioSetup  
ENTER  
4. To temporarily save the new settings, highlight DONE and  
press ENTER. To permanently save the new settings,  
highlight SAVE and press ENTER.  
VOL z  
RECALL  
MUTE  
Note:  
You can leave the TV in STEREO mode because it automatically  
outputs the type of sound being broadcast (stereo or monaural).  
• If the stereo sound is noisy, select MONO to reduce the noise.  
Digital audio selector  
To listen to an alternate language on an ATSC digital station  
(if available):  
You can use the Digital CC/Audio selector to conveniently  
switch between audio tracks on a digital channel (for those  
channels that have multiple audio tracks). This temporarily  
overrides the audio track chosen by the language option under  
Audio Setup.  
Highlight the LANGUAGE field in step 3 above, and then  
press to select the language you prefer.  
To listen to a second audio program on an analog station  
(if available):  
1. Press MENU and open the APPLICATIONS menu.  
Select SAP in step 3 above.  
2. Highlight DIGITAL CC/AUDIO SELECTOR and press  
ENTER.  
Note:  
• A second audio program (SAP) can be heard only on those TV  
stations that offer it. For example, a station might broadcast another  
language as a second audio program. If you have SAP on, you will  
see the current program on the screen but hear the other language  
instead of the program’s normal audio.  
3. Press or x to highlight the desired service, and then press  
ENTER.  
• If you have SAP on and the station you are watching is not  
broadcasting a second audio program, the station’s normal audio  
will be output. However, occasionally there is no sound at all in SAP  
mode. If this happens, set the MTS feature to STEREO mode.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
79  
HM94(E)076-81(8b-UseTV)  
79  
8/31/04, 2:44 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Adjusting the audio (continued)  
Adjusting the audio quality  
Using the StableSound® feature  
The StableSound® feature limits the highest volume level to  
prevent extreme changes in volume when the signal source  
changes (for example, to prevent the sudden increase in volume  
that often happens when a TV program switches to a  
commercial).  
You can adjust the audio quality by adjusting the bass, treble,  
and balance.  
To adjust the audio quality:  
1. Press MENU and open the AUDIO menu.  
2. Highlight AUDIO SETTINGS and press ENTER.  
To turn on the StableSound® feature:  
1. Press MENU and open the AUDIO menu.  
2. Highlight AUDIO SETTINGS and press ENTER.  
Audio  
Audio Settings  
Advanced Audio Settings  
Audio Setup  
3. Press z to highlight STABLE SOUND, and then press •  
to select ON.  
DVD  
CH RTN  
Navigate  
Select  
RTN Back  
EXIT Exit  
Audio  
Audio Settings  
Advanced Audio Settings  
Audio Setup  
3. Press z to highlight the item you want to adjust (BASS,  
TREBLE, or BALANCE).  
DVD  
CH RTN  
Navigate  
Select  
RTN Back  
EXIT Exit  
4. To temporarily save the new settings, highlight DONE and  
press ENTER. To permanently save the new settings,  
highlight SAVE and press ENTER.  
To turn off the StableSound feature:  
4. Press x or to adjust the level.  
Select OFF in step 3 above.  
x makes the bass or treble weaker or increases the balance  
in the left channel (depending on the item selected).  
makes the bass or treble stronger or increases the balance  
in the right channel (depending on the item selected).  
Resetting your audio adjustments  
The RESET function returns your audio adjustments to the  
following factory settings:  
5. To temporarily save the new settings, highlight DONE and  
press ENTER. To permanently save the new settings,  
highlight SAVE and press ENTER.  
Bass ............. center (50)  
Treble .......... center (50)  
Balance ........ center (0)  
StableSound... OFF  
To reset the audio quality to the factory settings:  
Highlight RESET in step 5 above, and press ENTER.  
The bass and treble are reset to 50 and the balance is reset  
to 0.  
To reset your audio adjustments:  
1. Press MENU and open the AUDIO menu.  
2. Highlight AUDIO SETTINGS and press ENTER.  
3. Press z to highlight RESET and press ENTER.  
4. To temporarily save the new settings, highlight DONE and  
press ENTER. To permanently save the new settings,  
highlight SAVE and press ENTER.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
80  
HM94(E)076-81(8b-UseTV)  
80  
8/31/04, 2:44 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Adjusting the audio (continued)  
Using the SRS WOW™ surround sound  
feature  
WOW is a special combination of SRS Labs audio technologies  
(SRS 3D, FOCUS, and TruBass) that creates a thrilling  
surround sound experience with deep, rich bass from stereo  
sound sources. Your TVs audio will sound fuller, richer, and  
wider.  
Turning off the built-in speakers  
Use this feature to turn off the TV speakers when you connect  
an audio system to your TV (see “Connecting a digital audio  
system” and “Connecting an analog audio system” on page 20).  
To turn off the built-in speakers:  
1. Press MENU and open the AUDIO menu.  
2. Highlight AUDIO SETUP and press ENTER.  
To adjust the WOW settings:  
1. Put the TV in STEREO mode (see “Selecting stereo/SAP  
broadcasts” on page 79).  
Audio  
Audio Settings  
Advanced Audio Settings  
Audio Setup  
2. Press MENU and open the AUDIO menu.  
DVD  
CH RTN  
RTN Back  
EXIT Exit  
3. Highlight ADVANCED AUDIO SETTINGS and press  
ENTER.  
Navigate  
Select  
3. Press z to highlight the SPEAKERS field, and then  
Advanced Audio Settings  
press to select OFF.  
Off  
Off  
Off  
SRS WOW:3D  
SRS WOW:Focus  
SRS WOW:TruBass  
Audio  
Audio Settings  
Advanced Audio Settings  
Audio Setup  
4. To temporarily save the new settings, highlight DONE and  
press ENTER. To permanently save the new settings,  
highlight SAVE and press ENTER.  
Reset  
Save  
Done  
DVD  
CH RTN  
Navigate  
Select  
RTN Back  
EXIT Exit  
To turn on the built-in speakers:  
4. Press z or y to highlight the WOW feature you want to  
Select ON in step 3 above.  
adjust, and then press x or to adjust the item.  
• 3D — To turn the surround sound effect on or off.  
Note: If the broadcast is monaural, the 3D effect does not  
work.  
Selecting the optical audio output  
format  
Use this feature to select the optical audio output format when  
you connect a Dolby Digital decoder or other digital audio  
system to the OPTICAL AUDIO OUT jack on the TV (see  
“Connecting a digital audio system” on page 20).  
• Focus — To turn the vocal emphasis effect on or off.  
TruBass To select the desired bass expansion level  
(HIGH, LOW, or OFF).  
5. To temporarily save the new settings, highlight DONE and  
press ENTER. To permanently save the new settings,  
highlight SAVE and press ENTER.  
To select the optical audio output format:  
1. Press MENU and open the AUDIO menu.  
2. Highlight AUDIO SETUP and press ENTER.  
To reset the WOW settings:  
Highlight RESET in the Advanced Audio Settings menu  
and press ENTER.  
3. Press z to highlight the OPTICAL OUTPUT FORMAT  
field, and then press to select either DOLBY DIGITAL  
or PCM, depending on your device.  
Advanced Audio Settings  
Off  
Off  
Off  
SRS WOW:3D  
SRS WOW:Focus  
SRS WOW:TruBass  
Reset  
Save  
Done  
Audio  
Audio Settings  
Advanced Audio Settings  
Audio Setup  
DVD  
CH RTN  
Navigate  
Select  
RTN Back  
EXIT Exit  
4. To temporarily save the new settings, highlight DONE and  
press ENTER. To permanently save the new settings,  
highlight SAVE and press ENTER.  
________  
SRS, WOW and the  
logo are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.  
SRS WOW technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
81  
HM94(E)076-81(8b-UseTV)  
81  
8/31/04, 2:52 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Using the memory card JPEG picture viewer/MP3 audio player  
You can use the memory card slots on the TV right side panel to  
view compatible JPEG files or play compatible MP3 files stored  
on a memory card (see “Memory card specifications” below and  
at right). You can display JPEG files in thumbnail mode or view  
them as a slide show.  
Maximum displayable JPEG image resolution: 6000x4000  
pixels.  
Maximum number of files per directory: 370.  
• All files over the 370th in a single directory will not display/play.  
• Files in directories more than 10 levels down from the top level  
directory will not display/play.  
Note:  
• Never remove the memory card or turn off the TV while  
using the memory card. Doing so may result in loss of data or  
damage to the memory card or TV. SUCH DAMAGE IS NOT  
COVERED BY YOUR TOSHIBA WARRANTY.  
• It is recommended that you back up your memory card data. Toshiba  
is not liable for any damage caused by the use of any memory card  
with this TV. Toshiba will not compensate for any lost data or  
recording(s) caused by the use of such cards.  
• For instructions on using your digital camera, refer to the owner’s  
manual for your camera.  
• For instructions on using your memory card, refer to the owner’s  
manual for your memory card.  
Maximum number of files per memory card: JPEG = 1,000;  
MP3 = 200.  
• All JPEG files over the 1,000th on a single memory card will  
not display.  
• All MP3 files over the 200th on a single memory card will not play.  
JPEG picture viewer:  
• The picture viewer supports JPEG format images only.  
• The files on your memory card must be in a file and directory  
format compatible with the TV or they will not display on the TV.  
• Images processed and/or edited on a personal computer (PC)  
may not display properly or at all. Some digital cameras may store  
images in a format that is not compatible with the TV.  
• Failure to take proper care of a memory card may prevent display of  
pictures or playback of MP3 files from the card or result in damage to  
the memory card or TV. SUCH DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED BY  
YOUR TOSHIBA WARRANTY. See “Memory card care and  
handling” on page 86.  
• The technical criteria set out in this owner’s manual are meant as a  
guide only.  
• Permission is required in order to download MP3 files and music from  
the Internet. Toshiba has no right to grant such permission. Permission  
should always be sought from the copyright owner.  
MP3 audio player:  
• The audio player supports MP3 format files only.  
• The files on your memory card must be in a file and directory  
format compatible with the TV or they will not play.  
• Files processed and/or edited on a personal computer (PC) may  
not play properly or at all. Some MP3 files may be in a format that  
is not compatible with the TV.  
• MP3 files must have the following format:  
- MPEG1 (ISO/IEC 11172-3) Layer3.  
Memory card specifications  
- Sampling frequency—MPEG1: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz.  
- Bitrate—MPEG1: 32–320 kbps.  
Supported memory card types:  
(3.3V) memory card  
- Channels—Stereo, Joint stereo, Dual channel, Single channel.  
- ID3 Ver. 1, Ver. 2.  
memory card (ver. 1.0)  
– MMC (MultiMediaCard)  
– Memory Stick(Pro)  
– CompactFlash® memory card (Type 1)  
Note: The picture viewer and audio player support FAT16 formatted  
cards only. (Memory cards formatted as FAT32 or NTFS, for  
example, are not supported.)  
Maximum memory card capacity: 256 MB.  
Maximum displayable JPEG image size: 8 MB.  
Note:  
• JPEG files larger than 8 MB will not display.  
• MP3 files have no size limit other than the maximum capacity  
of the memory card.  
_____________  
is a registered trademark of Toshiba Corporation.  
is a trademark of SD Card Association.  
MMC and MultiMediaCard are trademarks of Infineon Technologies AG and licensed to MMCA (MultiMediaCard Association).  
Memory Stick is a trademark of Sony Corporation.  
Toshiba is an authorized licensee of the CompactFlash® and CF logo® registered trademarks.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
82  
HM94(E)082-87(8c-UseTV)  
82  
8/31/04, 3:24 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Using the memory card JPEG picture viewer/MP3 audio player (continued)  
2. In a few seconds, the images automatically display  
Using the JPEG picture viewer  
on-screen, with one as a large picture and five in thumbnail  
format.  
Note: If you stored both JPEG and MP3 files on the same  
memory card, the JPEG picture viewer will start automatically  
when you insert the memory card in the TV. To start the audio  
player, you must first press EXIT to close the picture viewer and  
then start the audio player while the memory card is still  
inserted. See “To start the MP3 audio player when a memory  
card is already inserted,” on page 84. You cannot use the  
picture viewer and audio player at the same time.  
123/154  
2003, Jul. 18  
124/154  
2003, Jul. 18  
125/154  
2003, Jul. 18  
126/154  
2003, Jul. 18  
127/154  
2003, Jul. 18  
To view digital photos on your TV:  
3. Press x to rotate the large picture 90° counterclockwise.  
1. Insert a memory card into the appropriate memory card  
slot on the front of your TV.  
123/154  
2003, Jul. 18  
Note:  
124/154  
2003, Jul. 18  
Never insert more than one memory card at one time.  
125/154  
2003, Jul. 18  
Be sure to insert the card correctly—label side facing left and  
the end with the notched corner (if applicable) inserted into the  
memory card slot.  
126/154  
2003, Jul. 18  
127/154  
2003, Jul. 18  
• When a Compact Flash memory card is inserted correctly, the  
ejector button pops out (see illustration below).  
4. Press to rotate the large picture 90° clockwise.  
123/154  
2003, Jul. 18  
Memory card slots  
124/154  
2003, Jul. 18  
125/154  
2003, Jul. 18  
126/154  
2003, Jul. 18  
127/154  
2003, Jul. 18  
TV right  
side panel  
5. Press y or z to select another picture as the large picture.  
6. Press ENTER to view your pictures in a slide show.  
CompactFlash  
ejector button  
During the slide show:  
To rotate the picture, press or x, and then press ENTER.  
or  
To select another image, press y or z, and then press  
ENTER.  
or  
SmartMedia  
To stop the slide show and return to the picture viewer,  
press CH RTN.  
CompactFlash  
memory card  
SmartMedia  
memory card  
MMC  
(MultiMediaCard)  
To stop the slide show and return to the regular TV screen,  
press EXIT.  
or  
Secure Digital  
SD  
Memory Stick  
(Secure Digital)  
memory card  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
83  
HM94(E)082-87(8c-UseTV)  
83  
8/31/04, 3:25 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Using the memory card JPEG picture viewer/MP3 audio player (continued)  
To set the slide show interval:  
Using the MP audio player  
3
Note: The picture viewer must be closed before you can set the  
slide show interval.  
Note:  
• If you stored both JPEG and MP3 files on the same memory card,  
the JPEG picture viewer will start automatically when you insert the  
memory card in the TV. To start the audio player, you must first press  
EXIT to close the picture viewer and then start the audio player while  
the memory card is still inserted. See “To start the MP3 audio player  
when a memory card is already inserted,” at right. You cannot use  
the picture viewer and audio player at the same time.  
1. Press MENU and open the SETUP menu.  
2. Highlight SLIDE SHOW INTERVAL and press ENTER.  
Select the interval from the menu sidebar (2, 5, 10, 15,  
or 20 seconds).  
• While the MP3 audio player is playing, the VOLUME and MUTE  
controls can be used; however, those on-screen displays do not  
appear. Also note that the MUTE function has three steps (page 79).  
• Surround, bass, treble, and balance adjustments should be made  
before starting the MP3 audio player.  
• Permission is required in order to download MP3 files and music from  
the Internet. Toshiba has no right to grant such permission. Permission  
should always be sought from the copyright owner.  
To close the picture viewer:  
Press EXIT to close the picture viewer and return to the  
regular TV screen.  
To start the MP3 audio player when a memory card is not  
already inserted:  
1. Insert a memory card into the appropriate memory card  
slot on the front of your TV (see page 83 for details).  
To restart the picture viewer while the memory card is still  
inserted:  
Note:  
1. Press MENU and open the APPLICATIONS menu.  
2. Highlight PICTURE VIEWER and press ENTER.  
Never insert more than one memory card at one time.  
Be sure to insert the card correctly—label side facing left  
and the end with the notched corner (if applicable) inserted into  
the memory card slot.  
Applications  
• When a Compact Flash memory card is inserted correctly, the  
ejector button pops out (see page 83).  
TV Guide On Screen  
Digital CC Selector  
Picture Viewer  
CableCARD  
2. If you have only MP3 files on the memory card, the audio  
player will launch within a few seconds after being inserted  
and begin playing the first MP3 file on the memory card.  
3. Follow the steps under Viewing digital photos on  
your TVon the previous page.  
To close the picture viewer and remove the memory card:  
1. Press EXIT to close the picture viewer and return to the  
regular TV screen.  
NOTE: ALWAYS CLOSE THE PICTURE  
VIEWER BEFORE REMOVING THE  
MEMORY CARD.  
3. Press yz x • to navigate to the rewind, pause, fast  
forward, skip backward, and skip forward buttons, or to  
select another MP3, and then press ENTER.  
If you remove the memory card while viewing pictures, the card  
and/or saved data may be damaged. THIS TYPE OF DAMAGE  
IS NOT COVERED UNDER YOUR TOSHIBA WARRANTY.  
2. For a CompactFlash memory card, press the ejector button  
and then pull the card straight out from the TV.  
For all other memory cards, pull the card straight out from  
the TV.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
84  
HM94(E)082-87(8c-UseTV)  
84  
9/1/04, 11:59 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Using the memory card JPEG picture  
Using the Game Mode feature  
viewer/MP3 audio player (continued)  
You can use the Game Mode feature for shorter frame delays  
when playing a video game requiring split-second timing  
between the on-screen display and input from the controller  
(such as music creation and high-action games).  
Using the MP3 audio player (contnued)  
To start the MP3 audio player when a memory card is  
already inserted:  
Note:  
To use the Game Mode feature, the current video input must be  
Video 1, Video 2, Video 3, ColorStream HD1, or ColorStream HD2.  
The Game Mode cannot be turned ON when any other video input  
is selected.  
1. Press MENU and open the  
APPLICATIONS menu.  
2. Highlight AUDIO PLAYER  
and press ENTER.  
• When a 720p or 1080i input is selected, the TV must be in Natural  
picture size mode (page 69) in order to use Game Mode.  
3. Press yz x • to navigate  
• When a 480i or 480p input is selected, the TV must be in either  
Natural or Full picture size mode (page 70) in order to use Game  
Mode.  
to the rewind, pause, fast  
forward, skip backward, and  
skip forward buttons, and then press ENTER.  
• Game Mode cannot be used when the TV is in TheaterWide 1,  
TheaterWide 2, or TheaterWide 3 picture size mode. If the TV is in  
one of these modes, it will automatically change to Natural picture  
size if Game Mode is set to ON.  
To close the MP3 audio player:  
Press EXIT to close the audio player and return to the regular  
TV screen.  
• Closed captions are not available when Game Mode is ON.  
To close the MP3 audio player and remove the memory card:  
To turn on Game Mode:  
1. Press EXIT to close the audio player and return to the  
regular TV screen.  
1. Press MENU and open the PREFERENCES menu.  
2. Highlight GAME MODE.  
2. For a CompactFlash memory card, press the ejector button  
and then pull the card straight out from the TV.  
3. Press z or y to select ON and press ENTER.  
The TV will switch to Game Mode when the on-screen  
display closes.  
For all other memory cards, pull the card straight out from  
the TV.  
Note: If you adjust the volume or make any other adjustments  
that cause a menu or on-screen control panel to display, the  
Game Mode will be temporarily suspended until the on-screen  
display closes.  
NOTE: ALWAYS CLOSE THE AUDIO  
PLAYER BEFORE REMOVING THE  
MEMORY CARD.  
If you remove the memory card while playing MP3 files, the card  
and/or saved data may be damaged. THIS TYPE OF DAMAGE  
IS NOT COVERED UNDER YOUR TOSHIBA WARRANTY.  
Memory card care and handling  
• Use index labels made exclusively for your specific brand of  
memory card. Do not use commercially sold labels, which  
can cause a malfunction when the card is inserted or  
ejected.  
To turn off Game Mode:  
Select OFF in step 3 above or change the video input.  
• If the image does not appear correctly, clean the metallic  
area of the memory card using a soft, dry, lint-free,  
anti-static cloth, and then reinsert the card.  
You can change the video input in any of the following ways:  
• pressing INPUT on the remote control (page 67);  
• changing the channel using the Numbers or CH y/z, CH RTN,  
or FAV y/z buttons;  
• Prevent contact of the metallic area on the memory card  
with dust, dirt, or other foreign particles. Do not touch the  
metallic area of the memory card with your hands or  
otherwise handle it with anything other than a soft, dry,  
lint-free, anti-static cloth.  
• pressing TheaterNet DEVICE on the remote control (page 44); or  
• pressing TV GUIDE on the remote control (page chapter 7).  
NOTE: Toshiba is not liable for any damage caused by the use of any  
memory card with this TV. Toshiba will not compensate for any lost data or  
recordings caused by the use of such cards.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
85  
HM94(E)082-87(8c-UseTV)  
85  
8/31/04, 3:25 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Setting the ON/OFF timer  
Setting the sleep timer  
You can use the ON/OFF timer to turn the TV on and off at a  
preset time on a recurring basis.  
You can set the sleep timer to turn off the TV after a set length  
of time (maximum of 3 hours).  
Note: You must first set the time (see page 49).  
The sleep timer turns off the TV one time only, as opposed to  
the ON/OFF timer, which turns off the TV on a recurring basis.  
To set the ON/OFF timer:  
To set the sleep timer:  
1. Press MENU and open the SETUP menu.  
2. Highlight ON/OFF TIMER and press ENTER.  
Press SLEEP on the remote control to set the length of time  
until the TV turns off. Each time you press SLEEP, the time  
will increase in 10-minute increments, to a maximum of  
180 minutes.  
To cancel the sleep timer:  
Press SLEEP until it is set to 0.  
SLEEP  
3. Press z to highlight the DAY field, and then press to  
select the recurrence (weekends, weekdays, every day, etc).  
On/off Timer  
+10  
Turn TV ON:  
100  
ACTION  
MENU  
Every Day  
: 2 PM  
2 Hours  
Cancel  
Day  
Time(HH:MM)  
0
2
0
TV ON Duration:  
Clear  
Save  
ENTER  
4. Press z to highlight the TIME field, and then use the  
Number buttons to enter the time you want the TV to  
turn on.  
To set the sleep timer using the on-screen menus:  
1. Press MENU and open the SETUP menu.  
5. When the AM/PM field is highlighted, press to select  
AM or PM.  
2. Press z to highlight SLEEP TIMER and press ENTER.  
6. Press z to highlight the TV ON DURATION field, and  
then press to select the length of time until the TV turns  
off.  
7. Highlight SAVE and press ENTER.  
8. Turn off the TV. The TV will turn on automatically on the  
day(s) and at the time you set. The TV will then turn off  
automatically after the length of time you set in the TV  
ON DURATION field.  
3. Press the Number buttons to enter the length of time until  
the TV turns off automatically.  
Note:  
• When a power failure occurs, the ON/OFF timer settings may  
be cleared.  
Sleep Timer  
To display the on time setting, press RECALL.  
Enter total minutes until the TV turns off  
automatically(Maximum 180 minutes)  
To turn off the ON/OFF timer:  
1
8
0
Select NOT SET in step 3 above.  
Save  
Cancel  
4. Highlight SAVE and press ENTER.  
Note:  
• When a power failure occurs, the sleep timer setting may be  
cleared.  
To display the amount of time left on the sleep timer, press  
RECALL.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
86  
HM94(E)082-87(8c-UseTV)  
86  
8/31/04, 3:25 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 8: Using the TV’s features  
Displaying TV setting information  
on-screen  
Understanding the auto power off  
feature  
Press RECALL to display the following information on-screen:  
• Current input (ANT 1, ANT 2, VIDEO 1, etc.)  
The TV will automatically turn itself off after approximately 15  
minutes if it is tuned to a vacant channel or a station that  
completes its broadcast for the day. This feature functions in  
ANT 1 and ANT 2 modes only.  
• If ANT 1 or ANT 2 is the current input, whether it is  
Cable TV (“CABLE”) or off-air (“TV”)  
• Channel number (if in ANT 1 or ANT 2 mode)  
• Time (if set)  
Understanding the last mode  
memory feature  
• Timer settings (if set)  
• Remaining time on  
sleep timer (if set)  
• Remaining time on  
game timer (if set)  
If the power is cut off while you are viewing the TV, the Last  
Mode Memory feature automatically turns on the TV when  
the power is resupplied.  
• Stereo or SAP audio  
status  
Sample RECALL screen  
NOTE: You should unplug the TV’s power cord if it is possible  
that you will be away from the TV for an extended period of time  
after the power is restored.  
• V-Chip rating status  
• Picture size  
• Lamp mode  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
87  
HM94(E)082-87(8c-UseTV)  
87  
8/31/04, 3:25 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Using the Locks menu  
9
The LOCKS menu includes the RATING BLOCKING, CHANNELS BLOCK, INPUT LOCK, FRONT PANEL LOCK,  
GAME TIMER, and NEW PIN CODE features. You can use these features after entering the correct PIN code.  
Entering the PIN code  
If you cannot remember your  
PIN code  
1. Press MENU and highlight the LOCKS menu icon.  
While the PIN code entering screen is displayed, press RECALL  
four times within five seconds. The PIN code will be reset and  
you can enter a new PIN code.  
Locks  
Enable Rating Blocking  
Edit Rating Limits  
Channels Block  
Input Lock  
Front Panel Lock  
Game Timer  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
New PIN Code  
DVD  
CH RTN  
Navigate  
Select  
RTN Back  
EXIT Exit  
Changing your PIN code  
2. Press z, which displays the PIN code entry screen.  
1. Press MENU and highlight the LOCKS menu icon.  
2. Press z to display the PIN code entering screen.  
3. Enter your four-digit PIN code and press ENTER.  
4. Press z to highlight NEW PIN CODE and press ENTER.  
• The LOCK SYSTEM screen (below) appears if a PIN code  
has not been stored. Press the Channel Number buttons to  
enter a new four-digit code, enter the code a second time to  
confirm, and press ENTER.  
5. Press the Number buttons to enter a new four-digit code.  
Retype the numbers to confirm the PIN code you entered.  
6. Press ENTER. The new PIN code is now active.  
Locks  
Enable Rating Blocking  
Edit Rating Limits  
Channels Block  
Input Lock  
Front Panel Lock  
Game Timer  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
• The LOCKS ACTIVE screen (below) appears if the PIN  
code is already stored. Press the Channel Number buttons  
to enter your four-digit code and press ENTER.  
New PIN Code  
DVD  
CH RTN  
Navigate  
Select  
RTN Back  
EXIT Exit  
If the wrong PIN code is entered, the message “Incorrect PIN  
code” appears. Highlight RETRY and press ENTER. Enter the  
code again and press ENTER.  
When the correct PIN code is entered, the LOCKS menu  
opens.  
Locks  
Enable Rating Blocking  
Edit Rating Limits  
Channels Block  
Input Lock  
Front Panel Lock  
Game Timer  
Off  
Off  
Off  
Off  
New PIN Code  
DVD  
CH RTN  
Navigate  
Select  
RTN Back  
EXIT Exit  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
88  
HM94(E)088-91(9-Locks)  
88  
8/31/04, 3:32 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 9: Using the Locks menu  
Blocking TV programs and movies by rating (V-Chip)  
Some TV programs and movies include signals that classify the  
Independent rating system for broadcasters  
content of the program (violence, sex, dialog, language). The  
V-Chip feature in this TV detects the signals and blocks the  
programs according to the ratings you select. (See the tables at  
right for rating descriptions.)  
Ratings  
Description and Content themes  
TV-MA Mature Audience Only (This program is specifically designed  
to be viewed by adults and therefore may be unsuitable for  
children under 17.)  
Note: Rating blocking is a function of the V-Chip feature  
in this TV, which supports the U.S. V-Chip system only.  
L) Crude or indecent language S) Explicit sexual activity  
V) Graphic violence  
TV-14 Parents Strongly Cautioned (This program contains some  
material that many parents would find unsuitable for children  
under 14 years of age.)  
To block and unblock TV programs and movies:  
1. Press MENU and highlight the LOCKS menu icon.  
2. Press z, which displays the PIN code entering screen.  
3. Enter your four-digit PIN code and press ENTER.  
4. Press z to highlight ENABLE RATING BLOCKING.  
5. Press and then z to select ON, and then press ENTER.  
D) Intensely suggestive dialog L) Strong, coarse language  
S) Intense sexual situations V) Intense violence  
TV-PG Parental Guidance Suggested (This program contains  
material parents may find unsuitable for younger children.)  
D) Some suggestive dialog L) Infrequent coarse language  
S) Some sexual situations V) Moderate violence  
TV-G  
General Audience (Most parents would find this program  
suitable for all ages.)  
Locks  
Enable Rating Blocking  
Edit Rating Limits  
Channels Block  
Input Lock  
Front Panel Lock  
Game Timer  
Off  
Off  
On  
TV-Y7, Directed to Older Children (This program is designed  
TV-Y7FV for children age 7 and above. Note: Programs in which  
fantasy violence may be more intense or more combative  
than other programs in this category are designated Y7FV.)  
Off  
Off  
Off  
New PIN Code  
DVD  
CH RTN  
Navigate  
Select  
RTN Back  
EXIT Exit  
TV-Y  
All Children (This program is designed to be appropriate for  
all children.)  
6. Press z to highlight EDIT RATING LIMITS and press  
ENTER.  
Independent rating system for movies  
Locks  
Rating  
Description and content themes  
X-rated (For adults only)  
Enable Rating Blocking  
Edit Rating Limits  
Channels Block  
Input Lock  
Front Panel Lock  
Game Timer  
Off  
Off  
On  
X
Off  
Off  
Off  
NC-17 Not intended for anyone 17 and under  
Restricted (Under 17 requires accompanying parent or adult)  
New PIN Code  
R
DVD  
CH RTN  
Navigate  
Select  
RTN Back  
EXIT Exit  
PG-13 Parents Strongly Cautioned (Some material may be  
inappropriate for children under 13)  
The EDIT RATING LIMITS screen (below) appears.  
PG  
G
Parental Guidance Suggested (Some material may not be  
suitable for children)  
7. Press yzx • and then press ENTER to select the level of  
blocking you prefer. A box with an “X” is a rating that will  
be blocked. As you highlight a rating, a definition for the  
rating appears at the bottom of the screen. See notes at right.  
General Audience (Appropriate for all ages)  
Edit Rating Limits  
Note:  
TV(V-CHIP)  
TV-Y  
FV  
D
L
S
V
Movies  
G
Children  
Youth  
• If you place an X in the box next to “None Rated or No Rating,”  
programs rated “None” or “No Rating” will be blocked. However, if  
the program has no rating information provided, nothing will be  
displayed in the banner and ratings blocking will not be in effect.  
TV-Y7  
TV-G  
PG  
PG-13  
TV-PG  
TV-14  
R
NC-17  
X
TV-MA  
Save  
"None"Rated or "No Rating"  
Cancel  
To display the rating of the program you are watching, press RECALL  
on the remote control. If it is not rated, the word “NONE” appears.  
8. When done selecting the ratings you want to block,  
highlight SAVE and press ENTER.  
STEREO  
STEREO  
TV PG  
NONE  
L
V
On Timer: Every Day 6:00am  
Sleep Timer: 60 min.  
On Timer: Every Day 6:00am  
Sleep Timer: 60 min.  
Full  
5:09 pm  
Full  
5:09 pm  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
89  
HM94(E)088-91(9-Locks)  
89  
8/31/04, 3:32 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 9: Using the Locks menu  
Blocking channels  
Unlocking programs temporarily  
With the CHANNELS BLOCK feature, you can block specific  
channels. You will not be able to tune locked channels unless  
you clear the setting first.  
If you try to watch a TV program that exceeds the rating limits  
you set, the TV enters program lock mode.  
You can either unlock the program temporarily or select a  
non-locked program to watch.  
To block channels:  
1. Press MENU and highlight the LOCKS menu icon.  
2. Press z, which displays the PIN code entering screen.  
3. Enter your four-digit PIN code (see page 88 for details).  
To temporarily unlock the program:  
1. Press MUTE.  
4. Press z to highlight CHANNELS BLOCK and then press  
ENTER.  
2. Enter your four-digit PIN code and press ENTER.  
If the correct code is entered,  
the program lock mode is  
released and the normal  
picture appears. All locking is  
disabled until the TV is  
turned off, and will be enabled  
when the TV is turned on  
again.  
5. Press yzx • to highlight the channel you want to block,  
then press ENTER, which puts an X in the box next to that  
channel.  
Locking video inputs  
You can use the INPUT LOCK feature to lock the video input  
sources (VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3, ColorStream HD-1,  
ColorStream HD-2, DVI/HDCP) and channels 3 and 4.  
You will not be able to view the input sources or channels until  
you turn off the input lock.  
6. Repeat step 5 for other channels you want to block.  
7. Highlight SAVE and press ENTER.  
To lock the video inputs:  
To unlock individual channels:  
1. Press MENU and highlight the LOCKS menu icon.  
2. Press z to display the PIN code entering screen.  
3. Enter your four-digit PIN code and press ENTER.  
4. Press z to highlight INPUT LOCK and press ENTER.  
In step 5 above, press yzx • to highlight the channel you  
want to unblock, and then press ENTER to remove the X  
from the box.  
To block all channels at once:  
5. Press z to select the level of video input locking you prefer,  
Highlight BLOCK ALL in step 5 above.  
as described below:  
VIDEO: Locks VIDEO 1,  
VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3,  
ColorStream HD1/HD2,  
To unlock all locked channels at once:  
Locks  
Highlight ALLOW ALL in step 5 above.  
Enable Rating Blocking  
Edit Rating Limits  
Channels Block  
Input Lock  
Front Panel Lock  
Game Timer  
Off  
Off  
Video  
Video  
and HDMI.  
+
Off  
Off  
Off  
VIDEO+: Locks VIDEO 1,  
VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3,  
ColorStream HD1/HD2,  
HDMI, and channels 3  
New PIN Code  
DVD  
CH RTN  
Navigate  
Select  
RTN Back  
EXIT Exit  
and 4. Select VIDEO+ if you use the antenna terminal to  
play a video tape.  
Note: Make sure the POP is not on channel 3 or 4.  
OFF: Unlocks all video input sources.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
90  
HM94(E)088-91(9-Locks)  
90  
8/31/04, 3:32 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 9: Using the Locks menu  
Using the GameTimer™  
Using the front panel lock feature  
You can use the GameTimer to set a time limit for playing a  
video game (30–120 minutes). When the GameTimer is  
activated, the TV enters VIDEO LOCK mode and locks out  
the input source for the video game device.  
You can lock the front panel touchpad buttons to prevent your  
settings from being changed accidentally (by children, for  
example). When the front panel lock is ON, none of the  
controls on the TV front touchpad will operate except POWER.  
To set the GameTimer:  
To lock the front panel:  
1. Press MENU and highlight the LOCKS menu icon.  
2. Press z to display the PIN code entering screen.  
3. Enter your four-digit PIN code and press ENTER.  
4. Press z to highlight GAME TIMER and press ENTER.  
1. Press MENU and highlight the LOCKS menu icon.  
2. Press z to display the PIN code entering screen.  
3. Enter your four-digit PIN code and press ENTER.  
4. Press z to highlight FRONT PANEL LOCK.  
5. Press z to highlight ON and press ENTER.  
5. Press z to select the length of time until the VIDEO  
LOCK is activated (30, 60, 90 or 120 minutes) and press  
ENTER.  
Locks  
Enable Rating Blocking  
Edit Rating Limits  
Channels Block  
Input Lock  
Front Panel Lock  
Game Timer  
Off  
Off  
30 Min  
60 Min  
90 Min  
120 Min  
Off  
Off  
Off  
New PIN Code  
DVD  
CH RTN  
Navigate  
Select  
RTN Back  
EXIT Exit  
When the front panel is locked and a button on the  
touchpad is pressed, the message “Not Available” appears.  
To cancel the GameTimer:  
To unlock the front panel:  
Select OFF in step 2 above.  
Highlight OFF in step 2 above, or press and hold the  
VOLUME x button on the TV front panel for about 10  
seconds until the volume icon appears on-screen.  
To deactivate the video lock once the GameTimer has  
activated it:  
Set the VIDEO LOCK to OFF (see “Locking video inputs”  
on page 90).  
TV front touchpad  
Note:  
• A message will appear on-screen when 10 minutes, 3  
minutes, and 1 minute remain on the GameTimer.  
• If the TV loses power with time remaining on the GameTimer,  
when power is restored the TV will enter VIDEO LOCK  
mode, as if the GameTimer has expired, and you will have to  
deactivate the video lock (as described above).  
VOLUME  
VOLUME x  
MENU  
POWER  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
91  
HM94(E)088-91(9-Locks)  
91  
8/31/04, 3:33 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Troubleshooting  
10  
Before calling a service technician, please check the following table for a possible cause of the problem and some solutions.  
Problem  
Solution  
TV will not turn on  
• Make sure the power cord is plugged in, and then press POWER.  
• The remote control batteries may be dead. Replace the batteries or try the front panel buttons.  
• Press the RESET button on the TV front panel (page 9).  
• If you have recently replaced the lamp unit, make sure the lamp unit and lamp unit door are installed  
properly (pages 98–100).  
• The lamp unit may need to be replaced (pages 98–100). Also see “LED indications” on page 94.  
• Check the antenna/cable connections (Chapter 2).  
Picture problems  
• Press INPUT on the remote control or TV/VIDEO on the TV front panel and select a valid video input  
source (page 67). If no device is connected to any of the inputs on the TV, no picture will display when  
you select that particular input source. For device connection details, see Chapter 2.  
• Antenna reception may be poor. Use a highly directional outdoor antenna (if applicable).  
• The station may have broadcast difficulties. Try another channel.  
• Adjust the picture qualities (page 76).  
• If you are using a VCR, make sure the TV/VCR button on the remote control is set correctly (page 27).  
• If you have two VCRs connected to your TV, do not connect the same VCR to the TV’s output and input  
connections at the same time (page 18).  
• Do not connect a standard video cable and an S-video cable to VIDEO-1 or VIDEO-2 on the TV back (or  
VIDEO-3 on the TV front) at the same time (Chapter 2).  
Noisy picture  
• If you are watching a tuned analog channel (off-air broadcast or Cable TV), set the CableClear DNR  
feature to AUTO to reduce visible interference in the TV picture (page 77).  
Video Input Selection  
problems  
• If the Input Selection window does not appear when you press INPUT on the remote control or  
TV/VIDEO on the TV front panel, press INPUT or TV/VIDEO a second time, which will change to the next  
video input source and display the Input Selection window.  
Cannot view external signals  
or channel 3 or 4  
• If you cannot view signals from external devices connected to VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2,  
VIDEO 3, or ColorStream,® or from channels 3 or 4, make sure the INPUT LOCK is set to OFF (page 90).  
Black box on screen  
Poor color or no color  
• Set the CLOSED CAPTION feature to OFF (page 78).  
• The station may have broadcast difficulties. Try another channel.  
• Adjust the TINT and/or COLOR (page 76).  
• When the ColorStream signal source is active, the VIDEO OUT terminal outputs blank video. To receive  
video from the VIDEO OUT signal, a standard video or S-video IN jack must be used instead of the  
ColorStream connections.  
POP problems  
• The VIDEO OUT jack will not output the POP picture (pages 18 and 74).  
• Make sure you are using a supported or valid memory card format (page 82).  
• Make sure you have saved the picture files in the correct file format (page 82).  
• The card may be inserted improperly. Remove the card and reinsert it (page 82).  
• The memory card may be empty.  
Memory card  
problems  
• The memory card may be damaged.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
92  
HM94(E)092-97(10-Trbl)  
92  
8/31/04, 11:43 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Solution  
Sound problems  
• Check the antenna/cable connections (see Chapter 2).  
• The station may have broadcast difficulties. Try another channel.  
• The sound may be muted. Press VOLUME.  
• If you hear no sound, try setting the MTS feature to STEREO mode (page 79).  
• Make sure the SPEAKERS function in the AUDIO SETUP menu is set correctly (page 81).  
• If you are not receiving a second audio program from a known SAP source, make sure the MTS feature is  
set to SAP mode (page 79).  
• If you hear audio that seems “incorrect” for the program you are watching (such as music or a foreign  
language), the SAP mode may be on. Set the MTS feature to STEREO mode (page 79).  
• When using an external audio amplifier, if you connect the amplifier to the VAR. AUDIO OUT jacks, the  
volume of the TV and amplifier must be set above 0 or you will not hear any sound (page 20).  
Remote control problems  
• Make sure the remote control is set to the correct device mode (page 27).  
• Remove all obstructions between the remote control and the TV.  
• The remote control batteries may be dead. Replace the batteries (page 27).  
Your TV remote control may not operate certain features on your external device. Refer to the owner’s  
manual for your other device to determine its available features. If your TV remote control does not  
operate a specific feature on another device, use the remote control that came with the device (page 27).  
• If the TV stops responding to the controls on the remote control or TV front panel and you cannot turn off  
the TV, press the RESET button on the front panel (see page 9 for details). If the TV still does not act as  
expected, use the Restore Factory Defaults procedure as described on page 51.  
Channel tuning problems  
• Make sure the remote control is set to the correct device mode (page 27).  
• The channel may have been erased from the channel memory by the CHANNEL ADD/DELETE feature.  
Add the channel to the channel memory (page 42).  
• The channel may be blocked by the CHANNELS BLOCK feature. Unblock the channel (page 90).  
• If you are unable to tune digital channels, check the antenna configuration (page 40). If you are still  
unable to tune digital channels, clear all channels from the channel list (page 42) and reprogram  
channels into the channel memory (page 41). If you are still unable to tune digital channels, use the  
Restore Factory Defaults procedure as described on page 51.  
Closed caption problems  
• If the program or video you selected is not closed-captioned, no captions will display on-screen  
(page 78).  
• If text is not available, a black rectangle may appear on-screen. If this happens, turn off the closed  
caption feature (page 78).  
• A closed caption signal may not display correctly in the following situations: a) when a videotape has  
been dubbed; b) when the signal reception is weak; or c) when the signal reception is nonstandard  
(page 78).  
Rating Blocking (V-Chip) problems  
Recording problems  
• If you forget your PIN code: While the PIN code entering screen is displayed, press RECALL four times  
within 5 seconds. The PIN code you stored will be reset (page 88).  
• The V-Chip feature is available for the U.S. V-Chip system only (page 89).  
• If you use the TV’s remote control to start recording, you will not be able to change inputs (page 68),  
change channels (page 69), open the POP window (page 73), or open the FAV SCAN multi-window  
(page 75). If you attempt to do so, the message “Not Available While Recording” will appear on-screen.  
• It is recommended that you use the TV’s remote control to start recording. If you use a device other than  
the TV’s remote control to start recording and then attempt to access a feature that is normally denied  
during recording (POP mode, FAV SCAN mode, changing inputs, changing channels), the recorded  
audio and/or video may not be what you intended to record. See pages 68, 69, 74, and 75.  
• If you connected a Symbio AVHD recorder, in order to use its full functionality, you must first set up the TV  
Guide On Screen system (page 23 and Chapter 5).  
Other problems  
• If your TV’s problem has not been addressed in this Troubleshooting section or the recommended  
solution has not worked, use the Restore Factory Defaults procedure as described on page 51.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
93  
HM94(E)092-97(10-Trbl)  
93  
8/31/04, 11:41 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting  
LED indications  
The green and red LED lights are on the TV front touchpad, to the left of the POWER button.  
The green and red LED lights on the TV control touchpad (on the lower right corner of the TV screen) indicate the TV’s current status, as  
follows:  
• Green ON (solid) and Red OFF = TV power cord is plugged in but the TV is OFF. This is called standby mode.  
• Red ON (solid) and Green OFF = TV power cord is plugged in and the TV is ON.  
• Green and Red ON (solid) = TV front touchpad is being pressed.  
• Green and/or Red blinking (see table below).  
TV/VIDEO  
EXIT  
CHANNEL  
VOLUME  
MENU  
POWER  
TV/VIDEO  
EXIT  
CHANNEL  
VOLUME  
MENU  
POWER  
TV front touchpad  
Red LED  
Green LED  
LED Indication  
Condition  
Solution  
1) Green blinks 3 times  
after power cord is  
plugged in;  
The TV is warming up.  
Wait about 30 seconds until the Green LED lights continuously,  
and then press POWER to turn ON the TV.  
Red is OFF.  
2) Green is ON (solid);  
Red blinks continuously  
at 0.5-second intervals.  
The lamp unit door is not seated  
properly.  
Turn OFF the TV and unplug the power cord. Review “How to  
replace the lamp unit” on pages 99–100 to ensure that the lamp unit  
door is installed securely. If the problem persists, contact a Toshiba  
Authorized Service Center.  
3) Green blinks continuously The lamp is not working properly. The TV automatically will try to restart itself eight times (see item #4).  
at 0.3-second intervals;  
Red is ON (solid).  
4) Green and Red blink  
continuously at  
The lamp is not working properly Turn OFF the TV and then ON again. If the problem persists, replace  
after the eighth automatic restart the lamp unit (see pages 98–100). If the problem still persists,  
1-second intervals.  
(see item #3).  
contact a Toshiba Authorized Service Center.  
5) Green and Red blink  
An abnormal temperature  
increase has occurred.  
Turn OFF the TV. Check to make sure all slots and openings in the  
TV cabinet are not covered, blocked, or dusty. Turn ON the TV again.  
If the problem persists, contact a Toshiba Authorized Service Center.  
3 times only.  
6) Green is OFF;  
Red blinks continuously  
at 0.5-second intervals.  
The TV requires servicing.  
Turn OFF the TV and unplug the power cord. Plug the power  
cord in again and turn ON the TV. If the problem persists, contact  
a Toshiba Authorized Service Center.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
94  
HM94(E)092-97(10-Trbl)  
94  
8/31/04, 11:37 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting  
TV Guide On Screen® FAQs  
The following are frequently asked questions about the TV Guide On Screen system. The answers represent the most likely solutions to the  
problem.  
SETUP  
7. Q: I had a power outage. Do I need to go through initial  
setup of the TV Guide On Screen system again?  
1. Q: What if I move and my ZIP code or postal code  
A: No. The information you entered is stored in the TV Guide  
On Screen system memory.  
changes?  
A: Highlight SETUP in the Service Bar. Press z to highlight  
CHANGE SYSTEM SETTINGS (page 64), and then  
press ENTER. Follow the on-screen prompts to enter new  
information (see Chapter 3 for details). It can take up to  
24 hours to receive new data.  
Note: For Cable box users, the TV must be OFF and the Cable  
box must be left ON for the TV Guide On Screen system to  
receive channel line-up information.  
8. Q: How do I connect the G-LINK (IR blaster) cable to the  
G-LINKinput on the TV?  
2. Q: What if I change my cable hook-up to antenna or vice  
versa?  
A: See Chapter 2: Connecting your TV in this manual.  
You also can refer to the TV Guide On Screen prompts  
during VCR or Cable box setup.  
A: Highlight SETUP in the Service Bar. Press z to highlight  
CHANGE SYSTEM SETTINGS (page 64), and then  
press ENTER. Follow the on-screen prompts to enter new  
input information and rescan channels for the new input  
(see Chapter 3 for details).  
9. Q: When will I be able to view my TV program listings and  
use other TV Guide On Screen system features?  
A: The TV Guide On Screen system will be ready for use  
within 24 hours of initial setup.  
3. Q: What if I change cable boxes?  
A: Highlight SETUP in the Service Bar. Press z to highlight  
CHANGE SYSTEM SETTINGS (page 64), and then  
press ENTER. Follow the on-screen prompts to enter new  
input information and rescan channels for the new input  
(see Chapter 3 for details).  
10. Q: What should I do if I cannot complete initial setup?  
A: If you are unable to complete initial setup using the owner’s  
manual and the on-screen prompts, please call Toshiba’s  
National Service Division at 1-800-631-3811.  
4. Q: I used to have a cable box, but now I get direct cable.  
11. Q: If I make a mistake during setup, how do I go back to  
What do I do?  
the previous step?  
A: Highlight SETUP in the Service Bar. Press z to highlight  
CHANGE SYSTEM SETTINGS (page 64), and then  
press ENTER. Follow the on-screen prompts to enter new  
input information and rescan channels for the new input  
(see Chapter 3 for details).  
A: Complete the remaining setup steps. When “Confirming  
Your Settings” appears, select “No, repeat setup process.”  
Follow the on-screen prompts and input the correct  
information.  
12. Q: What if the channel number is not visible on my cable  
5. Q: If I add a recorder or change my cable service, how do I  
box?  
change my Setup information?  
A: Your cable box may be defaulting to a clock or time display  
once the channel changes. Watch the box carefully when  
testing the cable box brand code to see if the channel  
changes to 09.  
A: Highlight SETUP in the Service Bar. Press z to highlight  
CHANGE SYSTEM SETTINGS (page 64), and then  
press ENTER. Follow the on-screen prompts to enter new  
information (see Chapter 3 for details). It can take up to  
24 hours to receive new data.  
13. Q: Why wont my VCR turn on?  
A: There are several possibilities:  
6. Q: Why does it take up to 24 hours for the TV Guide  
a) An incorrect or “no VCR” code was entered during the  
TV Guide On Screen initial setup. Press the GUIDE  
button on the remote control, and then press to  
highlight SETUP. Press z to highlight “Change system  
settings,” and then press ENTER. Follow the on-screen  
prompts to select the correct VCR information.  
On Screen system to be ready for use?  
A: The initial setup process consists of finding the stations in  
your area that carry the TV Guide On Screen system data  
and tuning to those stations to receive the setup and  
listings data.  
b) Make sure the G-LINK (IR blaster) cable is connected  
correctly (see page 25).  
c) The VCR record timer is on. Turn off the timer.  
d) The wired remote VCR is incompatible.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
95  
HM94(E)092-97(10-Trbl)  
95  
8/31/04, 11:37 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting  
TV Guide On Screen FAQs (continued)  
20. Q: After some show titles, I have noticed from 1 to 4 stars  
CHANNEL LINE-UPS & LISTINGS  
14. Q: Why arent all my channels initially displayed?  
(****). What does that mean?  
A: These stars are a broadcast-industry ratings system used to  
inform you of a show’s quality. The more stars, the better  
the rating.  
A: After initial setup, approximately 120 channels are  
automatically displayed. The user may use the “Change  
channel display” feature to turn ON or OFF additional  
channels.  
21. Q: What do the colors for shows in the Listings and Search  
Note: Even though you have the option of enabling many  
more channels, the system may not have the memory capacity  
to hold detailed program descriptions for all of them.  
screens indicate?  
A: Green = Sports; Dark Blue = Children’s; Purple = Movies;  
Teal = Other Show.  
15. Q: When I opened the TV Guide On Screen system, I was  
asked to choose from more than one channel lineup.  
What should I do?  
22. Q: How do I add, delete, or change the assigned number of  
channels on the TV Guide On Screen system?  
A: Select the lineup that most closely matches the one for your  
area. If after you choose the lineup, you want to make  
changes to it, highlight SETUP in the Service Bar. Press z  
to select CHANGE CHANNEL DISPLAY. Follow the  
on-screen instructions.  
A: See the “Change channel display” section in the TV Guide  
On Screen owner’s manual.  
23. Q: Why are some of my channels listed on the wrong  
number?  
A: There are several possibilities:  
16. Q: Why do all my channels display No Listing?”  
a) Incorrect channel lineup was selected. Access “Change  
system settings” and choose “Yes, but my channel lineup is  
incorrect,” and then reselect the correct lineup.  
A: The TV Guide On Screen system has not yet received its  
data download. The phrase “No Listings“ will be replaced  
with program information during the next download cycle,  
which will occur within the next 24-hour period.  
b) Channel line-up changes have not yet been processed. Use  
the “Change channel display” feature to make adjustments.  
17. Q: Why do some of my channels display No Listing?”  
c) Initial setup was done incorrectly (that is, the wrong  
ZIP/postal code was entered.) Redo the initial setup.  
A: There are several possibilities:  
a) The channels in question were recently turned ON (in  
Change channel display) and TV Guide On Screen has yet  
to receive its next data download.  
b) After completing the initial setup, the first data download  
of the day was interrupted by a VCR recording.  
c) The TV power cord was left unplugged for an extended  
period of time and the TV Guide On Screen system was  
unable to receive program listings during the scheduled  
download cycle.  
d) Poor reception caused some of the data to be missed.  
e) The cable box was turned OFF. The TV power cord must  
be plugged in and the cable box must be ON.  
g) A/V Cable: The VCR was turned OFF. If the connection  
includes stereo cables with cable box to VCR and stereo  
connection from VCR to television, the VCR must be ON.  
24. Q: Why doesnt the program highlighted match up with  
the video window on my TV screen?  
A: There are several possibilities:  
a) The station in question made a late change to its scheduled  
program listing and the TV Guide On Screen system has  
not yet been updated.  
b) The TV is receiving broadcasts through a modified or  
boosted antenna system or a satellite dish (not supported  
by the TV Guide On Screen system).  
c) Initial setup was done incorrectly. (i.e., the wrong  
ZIP/postal code was entered.) Redo the initial setup.  
d) Incorrect channel lineup was selected. Access “Change  
system settings” and choose “Yes, but my channel lineup  
is incorrect,” and then reselect the correct lineup.)  
18. Q: A show entry in the TV Guide On Screen system reads  
e) The video window may be locked. Press SPLIT to unlock.  
No Listing.What does that mean?  
A: Show information for that entry was not available during  
the last TV Guide On Screen system information update  
(download). Show information is updated on a daily basis.  
25. Q: Can I move my favorite stations to the top of the TV  
Guide On Screen display screen?  
A: Yes. Use the “Change channel display” feature to make  
adjustments. Highlight the station call letters to be moved,  
then use the BLUE, GREEN, and/or Number buttons to  
reassign the position of the station.  
19. Q: I have seen the word downloadin reference to the TV  
Guide On Screen system. What does that mean?  
A: “Download” refers to the times throughout the day when  
the TV Guide On Screen system is receiving channel and  
listings information from your Cable or over-the-air  
antenna transmission.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
96  
HM94(E)092-97(10-Trbl)  
96  
8/31/04, 11:37 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 10: Troubleshooting  
TV Guide On Screen FAQs (continued)  
32. Q: Is Help available in the TV Guide On Screen system?  
OPERATIONS  
If so, how do I find it?  
26. Q: How can I look for a specific show in the TV Guide  
A: Yes. Highlight any of the five main Services (Listings,  
Schedule, Recordings, Setup, Search) and press the INFO  
key on the remote control. An expanded Info Box displays  
additional help information. Press INFO again to close the  
box.  
On Screen system?  
A: SEARCH lets you find shows by category (Alphabetical,  
HDTV, Movies, Sports, Children, Educational, News,  
Variety, Series) or by Keyword.  
Help is also available in a panel menu. Press INFO to  
display an expanded Info Box. Press INFO again to close  
the box.  
27. Q: My cable box will not change channels with the  
TV Guide On Screen system. Whats wrong?  
A: There are several possibilities:  
a) The incorrect cable box code was entered during TV Guide  
On Screen initial setup. Redo initial setup.  
RECORD/REMIND  
33. Q: Can I tune to a different channel while recording a  
b) The G-LINK (IR blaster) cable may not be connected  
properly (see page 25).  
program?  
A: No.  
c) The cable box has no remote capability and is  
incompatible.  
34. Q: How many programs can be scheduled for RECORD in  
the GUIDE?  
28. Q: How do I resize or close the Info window?  
A: There is no limit to the number of shows that can be  
programmed into the schedule memory.  
A: Press the INFO button on the remote control to resize the  
Info window. Press the INFO button again to close the  
Info window.  
35. Q: If a program is scheduled to RECORD on a Regular  
basis, does it count as five?  
29. Q: Is there a way to go directly to the next days listings  
A: No, whether a program is scheduled ONCE,  
REGULARLY, or WEEKLY, it only counts as one show in  
the RECORD stack memory.  
without scrolling through each time slot?  
A: Yes. Highlight the station you want to look ahead, use the  
Channel Number buttons on the remote control to enter  
“24,” and then press MENU. In the resulting menu,  
press z two times to scroll down to select the HOURS  
AHEAD option, and then press ENTER.  
36. Q: If I have a power failure, will I need to reset the  
recorded shows I have already programmed?  
A: The start times and channel numbers of shows that have  
been programmed will be retained in the memory of the  
TV Guide On Screen system. Titles will appear once  
listings are restored.  
30. Q: Why cant I record a show? All I get is snow or a blue  
screen.  
A: There are several possibilities (without a cable box):  
37. Q: Can I set a Record or Remind event without  
highlighting a show title in the TV Guide On Screen  
system?  
a) The recording unit was not connected or set up correctly.  
b) The incorrect channel lineup was selected. Press GUIDE  
and then to highlight SETUP. Press z to highlight  
“Change system settings,” and then press ENTER. Follow  
the on-screen prompts to select the correct channel lineup.  
A: Yes. TV Guide On Screen has a Manual Record and  
Remind feature. Highlight SCHEDULE in the Service Bar,  
and press MENU. Choose the event type, press ENTER,  
and then enter the date, start and stop time, channel  
number, and so forth.  
OPERATIONS (continued)  
31. Q: Why wont my VCR change channels and why does it  
38. Q: What do the frequencies for Record and Remind mean?  
change to the wrong channel?  
A: Once—records/reminds the show one time.  
A: There are two possibilities (with a cable box):  
Daily (manual only)—records the time, channel, input,  
recorder combination Monday through Friday.  
a) The VCR is not set on the correct output channel. Set the  
VCR to 03, 04, or whichever output channel is set by your  
cable system.  
Regularly— records/reminds the show every time the show  
airs on the same channel and starts at the same time.  
b) The VCR and/or cable box are hooked up incorrectly.  
Refer to your VCR owner’s manual or contact your Cable  
TV company for proper wiring procedures.  
Weekly— records/reminds the show each time the show  
airs on the same day of the week, on the same channel and  
starts at the same time.  
Off (not cancel)—keeps the show in the list but will not  
record/remind the show until the frequency is changed.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
97  
HM94(E)092-97(10-Trbl)  
97  
8/31/04, 11:37 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Appendix  
11  
Lamp unit replacement and care  
When to replace the lamp unit  
You should replace the lamp unit:  
Replacing the lamp unit  
(User-replaceable component)  
• if the picture darkens and/or colors fade;  
• if the screen (lamp) does not light (LED indication #3, page  
94); or  
• if you hear a loud noise and the picture goes black, which  
may indicate a lamp rupture (LED indication #3, page 94).  
WARNING: RISK OF  
ELECTRIC SHOCK!  
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, NEVER  
REMOVE TV COVERS, EXCEPT AS SPECIFIED  
HEREIN. REFER ALL SERVICING NOT SPECIFIED IN  
THIS MANUAL TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.  
Failure to follow this WARNING may result in death  
or serious injury.  
To obtain a replacement lamp unit:  
In the U.S.:  
Web  
Contact  
The light source for this TV is a mercury lamp with internal  
atmospheric pressure that increases during use. The lamp has a  
limited service life that varies depending on product use and  
user settings.  
Call toll-free  
1-800-631-3811.  
In warranty www.tacp.toshiba.com/service  
Consult your  
consumer  
electronics dealer  
for availability.  
Out of  
warranty  
www.ceaccessories.toshiba.com  
As is generally the case with all projection TVs that use  
projection lamps as a light source, the brightness of the lamp in  
this TV may vary somewhat over the expected service life and  
will generally decrease over time. The average useful service life  
for the lamp is approximately 8,000 hours in LOW POWER  
mode or 6,000 hours in HI BRIGHT mode. See “Selecting the  
Lamp mode” on page 72 for information on switching the lamp  
mode. Because these are averages, some lamps will require earlier  
replacement.  
In Canada:  
Contact a Toshiba parts distributor by directing your web browser  
to www.toshiba.ca. Click “Home Entertainment,” and then click  
“Support.”  
Use the replacement lamp unit model listed below only.  
Using any other lamp may cause damage to the TV  
and/or lamp.  
Note : The lamp is warranted only for the periods and to the  
extent set forth in the Limited Warranty applicable to this set,  
which is a substantially shorter period of time than the average  
useful service period. See “Limited United States Warranty” on  
page 102 or “Limited Canada Warranty” on page 103, as  
applicable.  
CAUTION: Always replace with same  
type lamp unit: Model No. TB25-LMP  
(Stock no. 23311083)  
If you use the lamp beyond its service life:  
• you may notice a reduction in the colors and/or brightness of  
the picture; and  
• the strength of the quartz glass in the lamp will be reduced  
and the lamp may rupture (often making a loud noise when  
this happens). If the lamp ruptures, the TV will not operate  
until the lamp unit is replaced.  
Note: The lamp unit is designed so broken lamp glass remains  
securely inside the lamp unit.  
CAUTION: Always handle the lamp unit with care.  
The lamp unit in this TV was designed for safe replacement  
by consumers; however, if the lamp unit is subjected to intentional  
abuse (such as excessive mechanical abuse or handling by children  
or pets), the unit may break, exposing sharp edges or pinch points.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
98  
HM94(E)098-105(11-App)  
98  
8/31/04, 11:59 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 11: Appendix  
Lamp unit replacement and care (continued)  
4. Using a manual Phillips screwdriver, loosen the two screws on  
How to replace the lamp unit  
the lamp unit.  
WARNING: RISK OF  
ELECTRIC SHOCK!  
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, NEVER  
REMOVE TV COVERS, EXCEPT AS SPECIFIED  
HEREIN. REFER ALL SERVICING NOT SPECIFIED IN  
THIS MANUAL TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.  
Failure to follow this WARNING may result in death  
or serious injury.  
Required tools: Manual Phillips screwdriver; gloves.  
Optional tool: 5/32” or 4mm Allen wrench.  
Lamp unit screws  
1. Turn off the TV and unplug the power cord.  
WARNING: RISK OF  
ELECTRIC SHOCK!  
WARNING: Eye damage may result from  
directly viewing the light produced by this  
lamp. Always turn off the TV and unplug the  
The lamp unit door is provided with an  
interlock to reduce the risk of electric shock and excessive  
ultraviolet radiation. Never defeat its purpose or attempt  
to service without removing the lamp unit door  
completely. Failure to follow this WARNING may result in  
death or serious injury.  
power cord before opening the lamp unit door.  
2. STOP! Allow the lamp to cool for at least one (1) hour  
before replacing it.  
5. Grasp the lamp unit handle and gently pull the lamp unit  
straight out of the TV. Set the old lamp unit aside (see  
“Disposing of the used lamp unit” on page 100).  
CAUTION: HOT SURFACE!  
The temperature of the lamp  
immediately after use  
exceeds 392°F (200°C).  
Touching the lamp before it has cooled will result in  
severe burns. ALLOW THE LAMP TO COOL FOR AT  
LEAST ONE (1) HOUR BEFORE REPLACING IT.  
3. On the lamp unit door on the side of the TV, loosen the  
thumb screw by hand or by using a 5/32” or 4mm Allen  
wrench, and then remove the lamp unit door.  
TV back  
Note: Wear gloves when  
replacing the lamp unit.  
(Continued on next page)  
Thumb  
screw  
Lamp unit door detail  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
99  
HM94(E)098-105(11-App)  
99  
8/31/04, 12:00 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 11: Appendix  
Lamp unit replacement and care (continued)  
8. Reattach the lamp unit door, making sure to insert the hooks  
on the left side of the lamp unit door inside the opening in  
the TV cabinet.  
How to replace the lamp unit (continued)  
6. Carefully insert the new lamp unit straight into the TV until  
it is fully seated.  
Insert the hooks inside  
the TV cabinet opening.  
Lamp unit door  
9. Replace the thumb screw and hand-tighten.  
Note :  
Thumb screw  
• Never subject the lamp unit to excessive shock.  
(hand-tighten only)  
• Never touch the lamp unit glass or otherwise get it dirty.  
Doing so may affect the image quality and reduce the service life of  
the lamp. See “Cleaning the lamp unit glass” below.  
NOTE : Make sure  
Lamp unit door  
the lamp unit door is  
installed securely; otherwise,  
the TV may not turn on.  
CLEANING THE LAMP UNIT GLASS  
If you accidentally touch the lamp unit glass or otherwise  
get it dirty, wipe it with a lint-free lens cleaning cloth (such  
as a cloth for cleaning camera lenses or eyeglasses).  
10. Plug in the power cord and turn on the TV. After the initial  
warmup period (which may take several seconds for full  
picture brightness), the TV should operate normally. If any of  
the following conditions exist, turn off the TV, unplug the  
power cord, and repeat steps 1–9 to ensure that the lamp unit  
and lamp unit door are installed correctly:  
CAUTION: NEVER clean a hot lamp with  
any type of flammable liquid or aerosol  
cleaning agent. Many ordinary cleaning agents  
• No picture • Dark picture • TV will not turn on  
(such as glass cleaners) contain chemicals that may be  
flammable at certain temperatures. If the lamp unit is not allowed  
to cool for at least one (1) hour, such chemicals may ignite.  
If, after repeating steps 1–9, the problem still exists:  
• In the U.S., call Customer Service at 1-800-631-3811.  
• In Canada, locate the nearest Toshiba authorized service  
depot by directing your web browser to www.toshiba.ca;  
click “Home Entertainment,” and then click “Support.”  
7. Using a manual Phillips screwdriver, tighten the two lamp  
unit screws.  
Note: Hand-tighten only. Do not use an electric screwdriver.  
Disposing of the used lamp unit  
• Place the used lamp unit in the empty box from the new unit.  
• Keep the lamp unit out of reach of children and pets.  
CAUTION: Always handle the lamp unit with care.  
The lamp unit in this TV was designed for safe replacement by  
consumers; however, if the lamp unit is subjected to intentional or  
accidental abuse (such as excessive mechanical abuse or handling by  
children or pets), the unit may break, exposing sharp edges or pinch points.  
Lamp unit screws  
(use manual Phillips screwdriver only)  
• Dispose of the used lamp unit by the approved method for  
your area.  
NOTE : The lamp unit contains mercury. Disposal of mercury may  
be regulated due to environmental considerations. For disposal or  
recycling information, contact your local authorities or the Electronic Industries  
Alliance (www.eiae.org).  
NOTE : Make sure the lamp unit and screws  
are installed securely; otherwise, the TV may not  
turn on and the lamp life may be shortened.  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
100  
HM94(E)098-105(11-App)  
100  
8/31/04, 12:00 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 11: Appendix  
Specifications  
NOTE:  
• This model complies with the specifications listed below.  
• Designs and specifications are subject to change without notice.  
• This model may not be compatible with features and/or specifications that may be added in the future.  
Television System  
Video/Audio Terminals (continued)  
NTSC standard  
ATSC standard (8VSB)  
Digital Cable (64 QAM, 256 QAM; in-the-clear, unencrypted*)  
HDMIINPUT:  
HDMI compliant (type A connector)  
HDCP compliant  
E-EDID** compliant  
Suggested scan rates: 1080i, 480p, 480i, 720p  
HDMI Audio: 2-channel PCM; 32/44.1/48 kHz sampling  
frequency; 16/20/24 bits per sample  
*Encrypted channels can be viewed on this TV  
using a CableCARD.See page 12 for details.  
Channel Coverage  
VHF: 2 through 13  
UHF: 14 through 69  
NOTE: This TV does not provide HDMI OUTPUT.  
VIDEO/AUDIO OUTPUT (also for recording):  
VIDEO: 1 V(p-p), 75 ohm, negative sync.  
AUDIO: 150 mV(rms) (30% modulation equivalent,  
2.2 k ohm or less)  
Cable TV: Mid band (A-8 through A-1, A through I)  
Super band (J through W)  
Hyper band (AA through ZZ, AAA, BBB)  
Ultra band (65 through 94, 100 through 125)  
VARIABLE AUDIO OUTPUT:  
0–300 mV(rms) (30% modulation equivalent,  
2.2 k ohm or less)  
Power Source  
120 V AC, 60 Hz  
G-LINKand IR OUTPUT:  
Power Consumption  
3 V(p-p), 3.5 mm mono socket (IR blaster cables supplied)  
250 W (average)  
45 W in standby mode (power cord plugged in and power OFF)  
IEEE-1394 INPUT/OUTPUT:  
IEEE-1394 compliant  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT:  
Audio Power  
15 W + 15 W  
Optical type  
Speaker Type  
Main: Two 4-inch (10cm) round  
Tweeter: Two 1-5/8-inch (4cm) round  
Dimensions  
46HM94: Width: 53-1/8 inches (1664 mm)  
Height: 31-13/16 inches (808 mm)  
Depth: 15-1/4 inches (387 mm)  
52HM94: Width: 58-3/8 inches (1483 mm)  
Height: 35-1/16 inches (891 mm)  
Depth: 15-1/4 inches (387 mm)  
62HM94: Width: 67-1/16 inches (1703 mm)  
Height: 40-15/16 inches (1040 mm)  
Depth: 18-3/16 inches (462 mm)  
Video/Audio Terminals  
S-VIDEO INPUT:  
Y : 1 V(p-p), 75 ohm, negative sync.  
C : 0.286 V(p-p) (burst signal), 75 ohm  
VIDEO/AUDIO INPUT:  
VIDEO: 1 V(p-p), 75 ohm, negative sync.  
AUDIO: 150 mV(rms) (30% modulation equivalent,  
22 k ohm or greater)  
Weight  
46HM94: 78 lbs (35.38 kg)  
52HM94: 83 lbs (37.65 kg)  
62HM94: 99 lbs (44.90 kg)  
ColorStream® (component video) HD INPUT:  
Y : 1V(p-p), 75 ohm  
PR: 0.7 V(p-p), 75 ohm  
PB: 0.7 V(p-p), 75 ohm  
AUDIO: 150 mV(rms), 22 k ohm or greater  
Suggested resolutions: 1080i, 480p, 480i, 720p  
Supplied Accessories  
• Two dual-wand IR blaster cables  
• Remote control with two size “AA” alkaline batteries  
NOTE: This TV does not provide ColorStream HD OUTPUT.  
Optional Stands:  
46HM94: ST4694 or ST4684  
52HM94: ST5294 or ST5284  
62HM94: ST6294 or ST6284  
_________  
** E-EDID = Enhanced-Extended Display Identification  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
101  
HM94(E)098-105(11-App)  
101  
11/3/04, 10:55 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 11: Appendix  
Limited United States Warranty  
for DLP Television Models  
Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C. (“TACP”) makes the following  
limited warranties to original consumers in the United States.  
Your Responsibility  
THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING  
CONDITIONS:  
(1) You must provide your bill of sale or other proof of purchase.  
(2) All warranty servicing of this DLP television must be performed by an  
Authorized TACP Service Station.  
(3) These warranties from TACP are effective only if the DLP television is  
purchased and operated in the U.S.A. or Puerto Rico.  
(4) Labor charges for installation, setup, adjustment of customer controls,  
and installation or repair of antenna systems are not covered by these  
warranties. Reception problems caused by inadequate antenna systems  
are your responsibility.  
(5) Warranties extend only to defects in materials or workmanship as limited  
above, and do not extend to any DLP television or parts that have been  
lost or discarded by you or to damage to the DLP television or parts  
caused by fires, misuse, accident, Acts of God (such as lightning or  
fluctuations in electric power), improper installation, improper  
maintenance, or use in violation of instructions furnished by TACP; use  
or malfunction through simultaneous use of this product and connected  
equipment; or to units that have been modified or had the serial number  
removed, altered, defaced, or rendered illegible.  
THESE LIMITED WARRANTIES EXTEND TO THE ORIGINAL  
CONSUMER PURCHASER OR ANY PERSON RECEIVING THIS DLP  
TELEVISION AS A GIFT FROM THE ORIGINAL  
CONSUMER PURCHASER AND TO NO OTHER PURCHASER OR  
TRANSFEREE.  
PRODUCTS PURCHASED IN THE U.S.A. AND USED IN CANADA ARE  
NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES.  
PRODUCTS PURCHASED IN CANADA AND USED IN THE U.S.A. ARE  
NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES.  
Limited One (1) Year Warranty on Parts and Labor*  
TACP warrants this DLP television and its parts against defects in materials  
or workmanship for a period of one (1) year after the date of original retail  
purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD, TACP WILL, AT TACPS OPTION,  
REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH A NEW OR  
REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU FOR PARTS OR  
LABOR. TACP Authorized Service Station personnel will come to your home  
when warranty service is required. Depending on the type of repair required,  
either the service will be performed in your home or the set will be taken to  
the TACP Authorized Service Station for repair and returned to your home at  
no cost to you.  
How to Obtain Warranty Services  
If, after following all of the operating instructions in this manual and checking  
the “Troubleshooting” section, you find that service is needed:  
(1) To find the nearest TACP Authorized Service Station, visit TACP’s web  
site at www.tacp.toshiba.com/service or call toll free 1-800-631-  
3811.  
(2) Present your bill of sale or other proof of purchase to the Authorized  
Service Station.  
Limited One (1) Year Warranty on Lamp Unit*  
TACP warrants the lamp unit in this DLP television against defects in  
materials or workmanship for a period of one (1) year after the date of  
original retail purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD, TACP WILL, AT TACPS  
OPTION, EXCHANGE A DEFECTIVE LAMP UNIT WITH A NEW OR  
REFURBISHED LAMP UNIT WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU. LABOR  
CHARGES FOR LAMP UNIT REPLACEMENT ARE NOT COVERED  
UNDER WARRANTY. The lamp unit is a user-replaceable component.  
For additional information, visit TACP’s web site:  
www.tacp.toshiba.com.  
ALL WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY STATE OF THE  
U.S.A., INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
Rental Units  
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,  
ARE EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE LIMITED  
WARRANTIES SET FORTH ABOVE. WITH THE EXCEPTION OF ANY  
WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY STATE OF THE U.S.A. AS  
HEREBY LIMITED, THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND  
IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES, AGREEMENTS,  
AND SIMILAR OBLIGATIONS OF TACP WITH RESPECT TO THE  
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY PARTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL  
TACP BE LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES  
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS  
INTERRUPTION, OR MODIFICATION OR ERASURE OF RECORDED  
DATA CAUSED BY USE, MISUSE, OR INABILITY TO USE THIS  
PRODUCT).  
The warranty for rental units, including the lamp units contained therein,  
begins with the date of first rental or thirty (30) days from the date of  
shipment to the rental firm, whichever comes first.  
*Limited Warranty for Commercial Units  
TACP warrants DLP televisions, including the lamp units contained therein,  
sold and used for commercial purposes as follows: all parts are warranted  
against defects in materials or workmanship for a period of ninety (90) days  
after the date of original purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD, TACP WILL, AT  
TACPS OPTION, REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH A NEW  
OR REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU.  
No person, agent, distributor, dealer, or company is authorized to change,  
modify, or extend the terms of these warranties in any manner whatsoever.  
The time within which action must be commenced to enforce any obligation  
of TACP arising under this warranty or under any law of the United States or  
of any state thereof is hereby limited to 90 days from the date you discover,  
or should have discovered, the defect. This limitation does not apply to  
implied warranties arising under the law of any state of the U.S.A.  
Owner’s Manual and Product Registration  
Read this owner’s manual thoroughly before operating this DLP television.  
Complete and mail the enclosed product registration card or register your  
product online at www.tacp.toshiba.com/service as soon as possible.  
By registering your product you will enable TACP to bring you new products  
specifically designed to meet your needs and help us to contact you in the  
unlikely event a safety notification is required under the Consumer Product  
Safety Act. Failure to register your product does not diminish your warranty  
rights.  
THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU  
MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS, WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO  
STATE IN THE U.S.A. SOME STATES OF THE U.S.A. DO NOT ALLOW  
LIMITATIONS ON THE DURATION OF AN IMPLIED WARRANTY,  
LIMITATIONS ON THE TIME WITHIN WHICH AN ACTION MAY BE  
BROUGHT, OR THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR  
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES; THEREFORE, THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS  
OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU UNDER SUCH  
CIRCUMSTANCES.  
0804  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
102  
HM94(E)098-105(11-App)  
102  
8/31/04, 12:00 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 11: Appendix  
Limited Canada Warranty  
for DLP Television Models  
Toshiba of Canada Limited (“TCL) makes the following limited warranties to  
original consumers in Canada.  
Your Responsibility  
THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING  
CONDITIONS:  
(1) You must provide your bill of sale or other proof of purchase.  
(2) All warranty servicing of this DLP television must be performed by an  
Authorized TCL Service Depot.  
(3) These warranties from TCL are effective only if the DLP television is  
purchased in Canada from an authorized TCL dealer and operated in  
Canada.  
THESE LIMITED WARRANTIES EXTEND TO THE ORIGINAL  
CONSUMER PURCHASER OR ANY PERSON RECEIVING THIS DLP  
TELEVISION AS A GIFT FROM THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER  
PURCHASER AND TO NO OTHER PURCHASER OR TRANSFEREE.  
PRODUCTS PURCHASED IN THE U.S.A. AND USED IN CANADA ARE  
NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES.  
(4) Labor charges for installation, setup, adjustment of customer controls,  
and installation or repair of antenna systems are not covered by these  
warranties. Reception problems caused by inadequate antenna systems  
are your responsibility.  
(5) Warranties extend only to defects in materials or workmanship as limited  
above, and do not extend to any DLP television or parts that have been  
lost or discarded by you or to damage to the television or parts caused  
by fires, misuse, accident, Acts of God (such as lightning or fluctuations  
in electric power), improper installation, improper maintenance, or use  
in violation of instructions furnished by TCL; use or malfunction through  
simultaneous use of this product and connected equipment; or to units  
that have been modified or had the serial number removed, altered,  
defaced, or rendered illegible.  
PRODUCTS PURCHASED IN CANADA AND USED IN THE U.S.A. ARE  
NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES.  
Limited One (1) Year Warranty on Parts and Labor*  
TCL warrants this DLP television television and its parts against defects in  
materials or workmanship for a period of one (1) year after the date of  
original retail purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD, TCL WILL, AT TCLS  
OPTION, REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH A NEW OR  
REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU FOR PARTS OR  
LABOR. TCL Authorized Service Depot personnel will come to your home  
when warranty service is required. Depending on the type of repair required,  
either the service will be performed in your home or the set will be taken to  
the TCL Authorized Service Depot for repair and returned to your home at  
no cost to you. IN-HOME SERVICE ONLY APPLIES WITHIN 100  
KILOMETERS OF AN AUTHORIZED TCL SERVICE DEPOT.  
How to Obtain Warranty Services  
If, after following all of the operating instructions in this manual and checking  
the “Troubleshooting” section, you find that service is needed:  
Limited One (1) Year Warranty on Lamp Unit*  
(1) To find the nearest TCL Authorized Service Depot, visit TCLs web site at  
www.toshiba.ca.  
(2) Present your bill of sale or other proof of purchase to the Authorized  
Service Depot.  
TCL warrants the lamp unit in this DLP television against defects in materials  
or workmanship for a period of one (1) year after the date of original retail  
purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD, TCL WILL, AT TCLS OPTION,  
EXCHANGE A DEFECTIVE LAMP UNIT WITH A NEW OR  
REFURBISHED LAMP UNIT WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU. LABOR  
CHARGES FOR LAMP UNIT REPLACEMENT ARE NOT COVERED  
UNDER WARRANTY. The lamp unit is a user-replaceable component.  
For additional information, visit TCLs web site:  
www.toshiba.ca  
ALL WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY PROVINCE OF  
CANADA, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,  
ARE EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE LIMITED  
WARRANTIES SET FORTH ABOVE. WITH THE EXCEPTION OF ANY  
WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY PROVINCE OF CANADA  
AS HEREBY LIMITED, THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE  
AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES,  
AGREEMENTS, AND SIMILAR OBLIGATIONS OF TCL WITH RESPECT  
TO THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY PARTS. IN NO EVENT  
SHALL TCL BE LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL  
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS,  
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR MODIFICATION OR ERASURE OF  
RECORDED DATA CAUSED BY USE, MISUSE, OR INABILITY TO USE  
THIS PRODUCT).  
No person, agent, distributor, dealer, or company is authorized to change,  
modify, or extend the terms of these warranties in any manner whatsoever.  
The time within which action must be commenced to enforce any obligation  
of TCL arising under this warranty or under any law of Canada or of any  
province thereof is hereby limited to 90 days from the date you discover, or  
should have discovered, the defect. This limitation does not apply to implied  
warranties arising under the law of any province of Canada.  
Rental Units  
The warranty for rental units, including the lamp units contained therein,  
begins with the date of first rental or thirty (30) days from the date of  
shipment to the rental firm, whichever comes first.  
*Limited Warranty for Commercial Units  
TCL warrants DLP televisions, including the lamp units contained therein,  
sold and used for commercial purposes as follows: all parts are warranted  
against defects in materials or workmanship for a period of ninety (90) days  
after the date of original purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD, TCL WILL,  
AT TCLS OPTION, REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH A  
NEW OR REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU. ON-SITE  
SERVICE ONLY APPLIES WITHIN 100 KILOMETERS OF AN  
AUTHORIZED TCL SERVICE DEPOT.  
Owner’s Manual and Product Registration  
Read this owner’s manual thoroughly before operating this DLP television.  
Register your product online at www.toshiba.ca as soon as possible. By  
registering your product you will enable TCL bring you new products  
specifically designed to meet your needs and help us to contact you in the  
unlikely event a safety notification is required under the Consumer Product  
Safety Act. Failure to register your product does not diminish your warranty  
rights.  
THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU  
MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS, WHICH MAY VARY FROM  
PROVINCE TO PROVINCE IN CANADA. SOME PROVINCES OF  
CANADA DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON THE DURATION OF AN  
IMPLIED WARRANTY, LIMITATIONS ON THE TIME WITHIN WHICH AN  
ACTION MAY BE BROUGHT, OR THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF  
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES; THEREFORE, THE  
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU  
UNDER SUCH CIRCUMSTANCES.  
0804  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
103  
HM94(E)098-105(11-App)  
103  
8/31/04, 12:00 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 11: Appendix  
Notes  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
104  
HM94(E)098-105(11-App)  
104  
8/31/04, 12:00 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Chapter 11: Appendix  
Notes  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
105  
HM94(E)098-105(11-App)  
105  
8/31/04, 12:00 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 46/52/62HM94  
Index  
A
E F G H I J  
A/V receiver connection ........................................................ 18  
ANT 1/2 ..........................................................................10, 40, 67  
Antenna cables ......................................................................... 11  
Audio player ............................................................................... 84  
Audio system connection...................................................... 20  
Auto aspect................................................................................. 71  
Auto power off........................................................................... 87  
AVHD ..................................................................................... 23, 49  
EIA-775......................................................................................... 22  
FAV SCAN button ..................................................................... 75  
Factory defaults, restore TV ................................................. 51  
Favorite channels .............................................................. 43, 75  
Features, TV ...................................................................................7  
Flashing front panel lights .......................................... 8, 9, 94  
Focus, SRS WOW ..................................................................... 81  
Front of the TV..............................................................................9  
Front panel lock ........................................................................ 91  
Front panel lights ........................................................... 8, 9, 94  
Front panel touch pad ....................................................... 9, 35  
Game Mode ................................................................................ 85  
GameTimer™ .............................................................................. 91  
G-LINK connection ................................................................. 25  
HD, A/V .................................................................................23, 49  
HDMI connection .................................................................... 19  
IEEE-1394.................................................................................... 22  
INPUT button ............................................................................. 66  
Input lock..................................................................................... 90  
Installation, care, and service....................................... 3–5, 8  
Installation, setup ........................................................................8  
Integrated digital tuning...........................................................7  
IR blaster ..................................................................................... 21  
JPEG .......................................................................................82–84  
B
Back of the TV ........................................................................... 10  
Blocking channels.................................................................... 90  
C
Cable box connection...................................................... 14, 16  
CableCARD™ ............................................................................. 12  
CableClear™ DNR .................................................................... 77  
Cables ........................................................................................... 11  
Camcorder connection........................................................... 13  
CH yz buttons ......................................................................... 69  
CH RTN button .......................................................................... 69  
Channel Number buttons ..................................................... 69  
Channel programming:  
Automatic programming .................................................. 41  
Manually adding and deleting ....................................... 42  
Cinema mode............................................................................. 72  
Closed captions ........................................................................ 78  
Color temperature .................................................................... 77  
ColorStream® ............................................................... 10, 15, 17  
Connecting devices .......................................................... 12–25  
CompactFlash® memory cards ........................................... 82  
Component video cables ...................................................... 11  
Component video (ColorStream®) .............................. 15, 17  
CrystalScan HDSC ......................................................................7  
L
Labeling video inputs ............................................................. 67  
Lamp mode ................................................................................. 72  
Lamp unit replacement ................................................ 98–100  
Language selection ................................................................. 40  
Last mode memory feature .................................................. 87  
LED indications ............................................................... 8, 9, 94  
Lights on front panel .................................................... 8, 9, 94  
Locking video inputs............................................................... 90  
LOCKS menu.............................................................................. 88  
Channels, blocking ............................................................. 90  
Enable rating blocking ...................................................... 89  
GameTimer............................................................................. 91  
MPAA rating.......................................................................... 89  
New PIN code ...................................................................... 88  
TV rating ................................................................................. 89  
Unlocking programs temporarily .................................. 90  
Video inputs, locking ......................................................... 90  
D
Device connections .......................................................... 12–25  
Defaults, restore TV factory ................................................. 51  
Digital Audio Out...................................................................... 20  
Digital signal meter ................................................................. 51  
DNR (Digital Noise Reduction) .......................................... 77  
Double-window POP feature............................................... 73  
DTV receiver connection ....................................................... 15  
DVD player connection................................................... 16, 17  
D-VHS .................................................................................... 23, 49  
DVI connection.......................................................................... 19  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
106  
HM94(E)106-107(Index)  
106  
8/31/04, 12:09 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 51/57H94  
Index  
(continued)  
M
S
Memory cards.....................................................................82–84  
Memory Stick™ memory cards ........................................... 82  
Menu system....................................................................... 34, 35  
MMC memory cards ............................................................... 82  
MP3.........................................................................................82–84  
MPEG-2 digital video signals .............................................. 22  
MTS feature ................................................................................ 79  
MUTE button.............................................................................. 79  
Safety, care, installation, and service ............................. 2–5  
SAP sound................................................................................... 79  
Satellite receiver connection ............................................... 15  
Scrolling the TheaterWide® picture................................... 71  
SD (Secure Digital™) memory cards ................................ 82  
Service .............................................................................................4  
Setup, TV.............................................................. 5, 8, 12–25, 40  
Setup, TV Guide On Screen system .................................. 36  
Sleep timer .................................................................................. 86  
SmartMedia™ memory cards .............................................. 82  
Sound quality adjustments................................................... 80  
Speakers ON/OFF .................................................................... 81  
Specifications...........................................................................101  
SpeedSurf.................................................................................... 68  
SRS WOW ................................................................................... 81  
StableSound® ............................................................................. 80  
Stereo sound .............................................................................. 79  
S-video cables ........................................................................... 11  
Symbio™ A/HD recorder ................................................ 23, 49  
System restore ........................................................................... 51  
System status ............................................................................. 51  
O P Q  
ON/OFF timer ............................................................................ 86  
Optical audio cable ................................................................. 11  
Picture adjustments:  
Color temperature............................................................... 77  
Picture mode ......................................................................... 76  
Picture quality ....................................................................... 76  
Picture-out-picture (POP):  
FAV SCAN button................................................................ 75  
FREEZE button ..................................................................... 74  
SPLIT button.......................................................................... 73  
Picture scroll............................................................................... 71  
Picture size selection .............................................................. 69  
Picture viewer ............................................................................ 82  
Problems with TV .............................................................. 92–97  
Quick Restart ............................................................................. 51  
T
TheaterNet™ DEVICE and CONTROL buttons ............. 45  
TheaterNet connection .......................................................... 21  
TheaterNet setup...................................................................... 44  
TheaterWide® picture.............................................................. 70  
Time and Date setting ............................................................ 49  
Troubleshooting ................................................................. 92–97  
TruBass, SRS WOW ................................................................. 81  
TV Guide On Screen® ...............................................25, 36, 53  
R
RECALL button ......................................................................... 87  
Remote control:  
Battery installation .............................................................. 27  
Device code table ........................................................ 32-33  
Effective range............................................................... 21, 26  
Functional key chart........................................................... 28  
Learning about the buttons ............................................ 26  
Operational feature reset ................................................. 31  
Programming ........................................................................ 30  
Searching and sampling the code ............................... 30  
Volume lock feature ........................................................... 31  
RESET button................................................................................9  
Restart, Quick ............................................................................ 50  
Restore TV factory defaults.................................................. 51  
V
V-Chip blocking (Locks menu) ....................................89–90  
VCR connection ................................................................. 13–18  
Video cables ............................................................................... 11  
Video input labels .................................................................... 67  
Video input lock ........................................................................ 90  
W
Warranty........................................................................... 102, 103  
WOW, SRS................................................................................... 81  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
107  
HM94(E)106-107(Index)  
107  
8/31/04, 12:09 PM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(E) 51/57H94  
TOSHIBA AMERICA CONSUMER PRODUCTS, L.L.C.  
HEAD OFFICE: 82 TOTOWA ROAD, WAYNE, NJ 07470, U.S.A.  
NATIONAL SERVICE DIVISION:1420-B TOSHIBA DRIVE, LEBANON, TN 37087, U.S.A.  
TOSHIBA OF CANADA LTD.  
HEAD OFFICE: 191 McNABB STREET, MARKHAM, ONTARIO, L3R 8H2, CANADA – TEL: (905) 470-5400  
SERVICE CENTERS:  
TORONTO: 191 McNABB STREET, MARKHAM, ONTARIO L3R 8H2, CANADA – TEL: (905) 470- 5400  
MONTREAL: 18050 TRANS CANADA, KIRKLAND, QUEBEC, H9J 4A1, CANADA – TEL: (514) 390-7766  
VANCOUVER: 22171 FRASERWOOD WAY, RICHMOND, B.C., V6W 1J5, CANADA – TEL: (604) 303-2500  
MANUFACTURED BY  
TOSHIBA AMERICA CONSUMER PRODUCTS, L.L.C.  
ColorStream, FST PURE, StableSound, and TheaterWide are registered trademarks of Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C.  
CableClear, GameTimer, SurfLock, Symbio, and TheaterNet are trademarks of Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C.  
SmartMedia is a registered trademark of Toshiba Corporation.  
PRINTED IN USA  
(04-11) (R1)  
Copyright © 2004 TOSHIBA CORPORATION. All rights reserved.  
HM94(E)108  
108  
11/3/04, 10:40 AM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Technicolor Thomson DVD Player DTH250E User Manual
Texas Instruments Power Supply SLVU013 User Manual
Toshiba Car Satellite Radio System L30W B User Manual
Toshiba Car Stereo System E6580772 User Manual
Tyco Electronics Car Video System ET2639L User Manual
Ultralink Network Card UL2 DA User Manual
VDO Dayton Car Stereo System CD1537x User Manual
VistaQuest Camcorder VQ DV7 User Manual
Volvo Automobile FH6X2FH User Manual
Watlow Electric Electric Heater Mica Strip Heater User Manual